Equilibrium Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry Chapter 7

Here we are providing Class 11 chemistry Important Extra Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Equilibrium. Chemistry Class 11 Important Questions are the best resource for students which helps in Class 11 board exams.

Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 7 Important Extra Questions Equilibrium

Equilibrium Important Extra Questions Very Short Answer Type

Question 1.
Write the expression for the equilibrium constant Kp for the reaction 3Fe (s) + 4H2O (g) ⇌ Fe3O4 (s) + 4H2 (g)
Answer:
Kp = \(\frac{p_{\mathrm{H}_{2}}^{4}}{p_{\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}}^{4}}=\frac{p_{\mathrm{H}_{2}}}{p_{\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}}}\)

Question 2.
How are Kc and Kp related to each other in the reaction
N2 (g) + O2 (g) ⇌ 2NO (g)
Answer:
Kp = Kc.

Question 3.
What is the equilibrium constant expression for the reaction
Al (s) + 3H+ (aq) ⇌ Al3+ (aq) + \(\frac{3}{2}\)H2 (g)
Answer:
Kc = [Al3+ (aq)][H2 (g)3/2/[H+ (aq)]3.

Question 4.
What happens to the equilibrium
PCl5 (g) ⇌ PCl3 (g) + Cl2 (g) if nitrogen is added to it
(i) at constant volume
Answer:
The state of equilibrium remains unaffected.

(ii) at constant pressure?
Answer:
Dissociation increases, i.e., the equilibrium shifts forward.

Question 5.
What does the equilibrium K < I indicate? ,
Answer:
The reaction does not proceed much in the forward direction.

Question 6.
For an exothermic reaction, what happens to the equilibrium constant if the temperature is increased?
Answer:
K = K/Kb.
Kb increases much more than when the temperature is increased in an exothermic reaction. Hence K decreases.

How to find Kp from Best fit line.

Question 7.
Under what conditions, a reversible process becomes irreversible?
Answer:
If one of the products (gaseous) is allowed to escape out (i.e., in the open vessel).

Question 8.
What is the effect of increasing pressure on the equilibrium?
N2 (g) + 3H2 (g) ⇌ 2NH3 (g)?
Answer:
Equilibrium will shift in the forward direction forming more ammonia.

Question 9.
What is- the effect of increasing pressure on the equilibrium.
CaCO3 (s) ⇌ CaO (s) + CO2 (g)
Answer:
Kc = [CaO (s)][CO2 (g)J/[CaCO3 (s)]
Kc = [CO2 (g)]
Similarly, Kp = PCO2.

Question 10.
The equilibrium constant for the reaction SO3 (g) ⇌ SO2 (g) + \(\frac{1}{2}\) O2 (g) is 0.18 at 900 K. What will be the equilibrium
constant for the reaction SO2 (g) + \(\frac{1}{2}\) O2 (g) ⇌ SO3 (g)?
Answer:
K = \(\frac{1}{0.18}\) = 5.55.

350 Degrees F to C 176.667 °C The Celsius (ºC) degree or Fahrenheit (ºF) degree […..] by Helen C.

Question 11.
For which of the following cases does the reaction go farthest to completion: K = 1, K = 1010, K = 10-10.
Answer:
The reaction having K = 1010 will go farthest to completion because the ratio (product)/(reactants) is maximum in this case.

Question 12.
Under what conditions ice water system is in equilibrium?
(a) at 273 K
(b) below 273 K
(c) above 273 K.
Answer:
(a) At 273 K.

Question 13.
The equilibrium constant for the reaction
N2 (g) + 3H2 (g) ⇌ 2NH3-(g) is K. How is the equilibrium constant for the reaction
NH3 (g) ⇌ \(\frac{1}{2}\)N2 (g) + \(\frac{3}{2}\) H2 (g) related to K?
Answer:
If K’ is the equilibrium constant for the reaction
NH33(g) = \(\frac{1}{2}\)N2(g)+ \(\frac{3}{2}\)H2(g)
Then, K’ = \(\frac{1}{K}\).

Question 14.
Write the relation between Kc and Kp for the reaction
PCl5 (g) ⇌ PCl3 (g) + Cl2 (g)
Answer:
Δn (g) = 2 – 1 = 1
Hence Kp = Kc × (RT)Δn = K × RT.

Question 15.
The equilibrium constant of a reaction is 2 × 10-3 at 25°C and 2 × 10-2 at 50°C. Is the reaction exothermic or endothermic? ,
Answer:
It is endothermic as the equilibrium constant has increased with temperature.

Question 16.
What is the thermodynamic criterion for the state of equilibrium?
Answer:
At equilibrium, (ΔG)TP = 0.

Question 17.
Which measurable property becomes constant in water ⇌ water vapor equilibrium at constant temperature?
Answer:
Vapour pressure.

Question 18.
What happens to the dissociation of PCl5 in a closed vessel if helium gas is introduced into it at the same temperature?
Answer:
No effect.

Question 19.
What are the conditions for getting NH33 by Haber’s process?
N2 (g) + 3H2 (g) 2NH3 (g); ΔH = – Q.
Answer:
High concentration of N2 and H2, low temperature, and high pressure.

Question 20.
What happens if ferric salt is added to the equilibrium of the reaction between Fe3+ and SCN̅ ions?
Answer:
The red color deepens. Equilibrium shifts in the forward direction.

Question 21.
Does the value of equilibrium constant change on adding, a catalyst?
Answer:
No.

Question 22.
Name the factors which affect the equilibrium state.
Answer:
Temperature, pressure, and concentration.

Ionic Strength Calculator … Ionic strength is used to measure the concentration of the ions in a solution.

Question 23.
What happens to the ionic product of water if some acid is added into the water?
Answer:
It remains unchanged.

Question 24.
What is the pH of 0.1 M HCl?
Answer:
pH = – log [H+] = – log 10-1 = 1.

Question 25.
Which conjugate base is stronger: CN̅ or F̅?
Answer:
CN̅ is a stronger base than F̅

Question 26.
The dimethyl ammonium ion (CH3)2 NH2+ is a weak acid. What is its conjugate base?
Answer:
(CH3)2NH.

Question 27.
Write the solubility product expression for:
Ag2CrO4 (s) ⇌ 2Ag+ (aq) + CrO42- (aq)
Answer:
Ksp = [Ag+]2[CrO42-].

Question 28.
When does salt get precipitated in solution?
Answer:
When the Ionic product of its ions exceeds its solubility product.

Question 29.
The Ksp value of salt is high. What does it indicate?
Answer:
This means that the salt is highly soluble in water.

Question 30.
Select the Lewis acid and Lewis base in
SnCl4 + 2Cl → [SnCl66]2-.
Answer:
SnCl4 is acid and Cl is a base.

Question 31.
Out of pure water and 0.1. KCl solution in which AgCl will dissolve more?
Answer:
Pure water.

Question 32.
Write the conjugate acid and conjugate base of water?
Answer:
Conjugate acid H3O+ and conjugate base OH̅.

Question 33.
Select Lewis acids and Lewis bases from the following: Cu2+, H2O, BF3, OH.
Answer:
Lewis acids: Cu2+, BF3
Lewis base: H2O, OH.

Question 34.
Give two examples of cations that can act as Lewis acids.
Answer:
Ag+, H+.

Question 35.
What is the difference between a conjugate acid and a conjugate base?
Answer:
A conjugate acid and its conjugate base differ from each other by a proton.

Question 36.
What is the active mass of water?
Answer:
55.5 mol L-1

Question 37.
Whether the pH value of an aqueous solution of sodium acetate will be 7 or greater than 7?
Answer:
It is greater than 7.

Question 38.
An old sample of an aqueous solution of CuSO4 is acidic. Why?
Answer:
On keeping CuS04 solution undergoes hydrolysis to give H2SO4 a strong acid and a weak base Cu(OH)2

Question 39.
What happens to the pH of ammonium acetate solution when a few drops of acid are added to it?
Answer:
pH will remain unchanged as ammonium acetate (CH3COONH4) solution is a buffer.

Question 40.
What happens when HCl gas is passed through NaCl solution?
Answer:
NaCl will precipitate out.

Question 41.
What is the value of H3O+ ions and OH ions in water at 298 K?
Answer:
[H3O+] = [OH̅] 1.0 × 10-7 mL-1.

Question 42.
Will the ionic products of water increase or decrease on increasing the temperature?
Answer:
It increases with the increase in temperature.

Question 43.
Give one example of
(i) acidic buffer
Answer:
Acidic buffer: CH3COOH + CH3COONa

(ii) basic buffer.
Answer:
Basic buffer: NH4OH + NH4Cl.

Question 44.
Write down the conjugate base of [Al(H2O)6]3+.
Answer:
[Al(0H)(H2O)5]2+ is the conjugate base of [Al(H2O)6]3+.

Question 45.
The Ksp of CuS, Ag2S, HgS is 10-31, 10-44, 10-54 respectively. What is the order of the solubility of these sulfides?
Answer:
CuS > Ag2S > HgS.

Question 46.
Ksp for HgSO4 is 6.4 × 10-5. What is the solubility of the salt?
Answer:
S = \(\sqrt{\mathrm{K}_{s p}}=\sqrt{6.4 \times 10^{-5}}\)= 8 × 10-3 mol L-1.

Question 47.
The solubility product (K ) of silver chloride is 1.8 × 10-10 at 298 K. What is the solubility of AgO in 0.01 M HCl in mol L-1?
Answer:
[Ag+] = \(\frac{\mathrm{K}_{s p}}{\left|\mathrm{Cl}^{-}\right|}=\frac{1.8 \times 10^{-10}}{0.01}\) = 1.8 × 10-8 mol L-1
∴ Solubility of AgCl = 1.8 × 10-8 Mol L-1.

Question 48.
How does dilution with water affect the pH of a buffer solution?
Answer:
Dilution with water of a buffer solution has no effect on the pH of a buffer solution.

Question 49.
What is the pH of our blood? Why does it not change in spite of the variety of foods and Spices we eat?
Answer:
the pH of our blood is about 7.4. It remains constant because blood is a buffer.

Question 50.
Why does boric acid act as Lewis acid?
Answer:
Boric a.cid acts as a Lewis acid by accepting electrons from hydroxyl ions.
B(OH)3 + 2HOH → B(OH)4 + H3+O.

Question 51.
When a precipitate formed when solutions of BaCl2 and Na2SO4 are mixed?
Answer:
When in the final solution after mixing, the ionic product.
[Ba2+] [SO42- ] exceeds Ksp for BaSO4.

Question 52.
What is the common ion effect?
Answer:
The suppression of the dissociation of a weak electrolyte by the addition of a strong electrolyte having a common ion.

Question 53.
Arrange them in increasing order of the extent of hydrolysis.
CCl4, MgCl2, AlCl3 PCl5, SiCl4.
Answer:
The increasing order of the extent of hydrolysis is CCl4 < MgCl2 < AlCl3 < PCl5 < SiCl4.

Question 54.
Mention two different ways of drawing the following equilibrium towards the right
Equilibrium Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 1
[W.B. JEE 2003]
Answer:

  1. By adding more of CH3COOH or CH3CH2OH.
  2. By removing the ester or water formed.

Question 55.
Give one example of everyday life in which there is gas ⇌ solution equilibrium.
Answer:
Soda-water bottle.

Question 56.
What is the relationship between pKa and pKb values where Ka, Kb represent ionization constants of the acid and its conjugate base respectively?
Answer:
pKa + pKb = pKw =14.

Question 57.
What is the relationship between pH and pOH?
Answer:
pH + pOH= pKw = 14.

Question 58.
What is the function of adding NH4OH in group V?
Answer:
It converts any NH4HCO3 present into (NH4)2CO3.

Question 59.
What happens to the solubility of AgCl in water if NaCl solution is added to it?
Answer:
Solubility of AgCl decreases due to the common ion effect.

Question 60.
Write the expression for comparison of relative strengths of two weak acids in terms of their ionization constants.
Answer:
\(\frac{\text { Strength of acid }_{1}}{\text { Strength of acid }_{2}}=\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{K}_{a_{1}}}{\mathrm{~K}_{a_{2}}}}\)

Equilibrium Important Extra Questions Short Answer Type

Question 1.
Justify the statement that water behaves like acid as well as a base on the basis of the protonic concept.
Answer:
Water ionizes as H2O + H2O ⇌ H3O+ + OH
With strong acids, water behaves as a base by accepting a proton from an acid.
HCl + H2O ⇌ H3O+ (aq) + Cl (aq)
While with bases, water behaves as an acid by liberating a proton
NH3 + H2O ⇌ NH4+ (aq) + OH (aq).

Question 2.
What is pOH? What is its value for pure water at 298 K?
Answer:
pOH = – log [OH]
pH + pOH = 14 for pure water at 298 K
pH = 7
or
pOH of water at 298 = 7.

Question 3.
Calculate the pH of a buffer solution containing 0.1 moles of acetic acid and 0.15 mole of sodium acetate. The ionization constant for acetic acid is 1.75 × 10-5.
Answer:
Equilibrium Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 2

Question 4.
An aqueous solution of CuSO4 is acidic while that of Na2SO4 is neutral. Explain.
Answer:
CuSO4 + 2H2O ⇌ Cu(OH)2 + H2SO4 (weak base strong acid)
CuS04 is the salt of weak base Cu(OH)2 and a strong acid H2SO4.
Thus the solution will have free H+ ions and will, therefore, be acidic.

Na2SO4, being the salt of a strong acid H2SO4 and a strong base.
NaOH does not undergo hydrolysis. The solution is, therefore, neutral.

Question 5.
The dissociation constants of HCN, CH3COOH, and HF are 7.2 × 10-10, 1.8 × 10-5, and 6.7 × 10-4 respectively. Arrange them in increasing order of acid strength.
Answer:
More the value of Ka, the stronger the acid
Their Ka1S are 6.7 × 10-4 > 1.8 × 10-5 > 7.2 × 10-10
∴ HCN < CH3COOH < HF.

Question 6.
The dissociation of PCl5 decreases in presence of Cl2. Why?
Answer:
For PCl5 ⇌ PCl3 + Cl2.
According to Le Chatelier’s principle, an increase in the concentration of Cl2 (one of the products) at equilibrium will favor the backward reaction, and thus the dissociation of PCl5 into PCl3 and Cl2 decreases.

Question 7.
The dissociation of HI is independent of pressure while dissociation of PCl5 depends upon the pressure applied. Why?•
Answer:
For 2HI ⇌ H2 + I2
Kc = \(\frac{x^{2}}{4(1-x)^{2}}\)
where x = degree of dissociation

For PCl5 ⇌ PCl3 + Cl2
K = \(\frac{x^{2}}{V(1-x)^{2}}\); V = Volume of container.

Kc for HI does not have a volume factor- and dissociation is independent of volume and hence pressure.
Kc for PCl5 has volume in the denominator and hence dissociation of PCl5 depends upon the volume and consequently pressure.

Question 8.
The reaction between ethyl acetate and water attains a state of equilibrium in an open vessel, but not the decomposition of CaCO3. Explain.
Answer:
CH2 COOC2H5 (l) + H2O (l) ⇌ CH3COOH (l) + C2H5OH (l)
Here both reactants and products are liquids and they will not escape from the vessel even if it is open. Therefore equilibrium is attained.
CaSO3 (s) ⇌ CaO (s) + CO2 (g)
Here CO2 is a gas. It will escape from the vessel if it is open and so backward reaction cannot take place. Therefore equilibrium is attained.

Question 9.
The degree of dissociation of N2O4 is α according to the reaction
N2O4 (g) ⇌ 2NO2 (g) at temperature T and total pressure P.
Find the expression for the equilibrium constant of this reaction.
Answer:
Equilibrium Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 3
Total moles at eqbm. = 1 – α + 2α = 1 + α
If P is total pressure
Equilibrium Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 4

Question 10.
Why NH4Cl is added in precipitating III group hydroxides before the addition of NH4OH?
Answer:
To prevent precipitation of IV group hydroxides (especially Mn) along with III group hydroxides. NH4Cl decreases dissociation of NH4OH and thus limited OH ions are present in solution to precipitate III group cations only
NH4OH ⇌ NH4 (aq) + OH (aq) to a small extent
NH4Cl (aq) ⇌ NH4 (aq) + Cl (aq) to a large extent
Due to common ion affect the degree of dissociation of NH4OH decreases leaving only a small no. of OH̅ ions.

Question 11.
If concentrations are expressed in moles L-1 and pressures in atmospheres. What is the ratio of Kp to Kc for the
2SO2 + O2 (g) ⇌ 2SO3 (g)
Answer:
Equilibrium Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 5

Question 12.
The equilibrium constants for the reactions
N2 + O2 ⇌ 2NOand
2NO + O2 ⇌ 2NO2 are K1 and K2 respectively, then what would be the equilibrium constant for the reactions.
N2 + 2O2 ⇌ 2NO2?
Answer:
Equilibrium Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 6

Question 13.
What qualitative information can be obtained from the magnitude of the equilibrium constant?
Answer:

  1. Large values of equilibrium constant (> 103) show that the forward direction is favored i.e. concentration of products is much larger than that of the reactants of equilibrium.
  2. Intermediate values of K (10-3 to 103) show that the concentrations of the reactants and products are comparable.
  3. The low value of K (< 10-3) shows that the backward reaction is favored, i.e., the concentration of reactants is much large than that of. products.

Question 14.
The following reaction has attained equilibrium
CO (g) + 2H2 (g) ⇌ CH3OH (g); ΔH° = – 92.0 kJ mol-1.
What will happen if
(i) the volume of the vessel is suddenly reduced to half?
Answer:
Kc = [CH3OH]/[CO][H2]2, Kp = PCH3OH/PCO × PH2
When the volume of the vessel is reduced to half, the concentration of each reactant or product becomes double. Thus
Qc = 2[CH3OH]/2[CO] × {2[H2]}2 = i K..
As Qc < Kp, equilibrium will shift in the forward direction.

(ii) The partial pressure of hydrogen is suddenly doubled (ii) an inert gas is added to the system.
Answer:
As volume remains constant, molar concentration will not change. Hence there is no effect on the state of equilibrium.

Question 15.
How does the degree of ionization of a weak electrolyte vary with concentration? Give exact relationship. What is this law called?
Answer:
α = \(\sqrt{\mathrm{K}_{i} / c}\) . It is called Ostwald’s dilution law.
(Ki is ionization constant and c is the molar concentration).

Question 16.
The ionization constant for formic acid and acetic acid is 17.7 × 10-5 and 1.77 × 10-5. Which acid is stronger and how many times the other if equimolar concentrations of the two are taken?
Answer:
Ka for HCOOH > Ka for CH3COOH. Hence formic acid is stronger.
Further \(\frac{\text { Strength of } \mathrm{HCOOH}}{\text { Strength of } \mathrm{CH}_{3} \mathrm{COOH}}=\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{HCOOH}}}{\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{CH}_{3} \mathrm{COOH}}}}\)
= \(\sqrt{10}\) = 3.16 times.

Question 17.
Out of CH3COO̅ and OH̅ which is the stronger base and why?
Answer:
OH̅ ions can combine with H+ ions more readily than CH3COO̅ ions can do. Hence OH̅ is a stronger base.

Question 18.
What is pKw? What is it? value at 25°C?
Answer:
pKw = – log Kw = – log 10-14 = 14.

Question 19.
What are pH and pOH values of a neutral solution at a temperature at which = 10-13?
Answer:
pKw = pH + pOH, But pKw =13
Hence pH = pOH = 6.5.

Question 20.
The ionization constants of HF = 6.8 × 10-4. Calculate the ionization constant of the corresponding conjugate base.
Answer:
Kb = \(\frac{\mathrm{K}_{w}}{\mathrm{~K}_{c}}=\frac{10^{-14}}{6.8 \times 10^{-4}}\) = 1.47 × 10-11.

Question 21.
What is the difference between an ionic product a rich solubility product?
Answer:
Solubility product is the product of the molar concentrations of the ions in a saturated solution, but the ionic product is for any solution.

Question 22.
Why common salt is added to precipitate soap from the solution during its manufacture?
Answer:
Soap is the sodium salt of higher fatty acid [RCOONa].
On adding common salt, Na+ ion concentration increases.
Hence the equilibrium RCOONa (s) ⇌ RCOO̅ + Na+ shifts in the backward direction, i.e., soap precipitates out.

Question 23.
Through a solution containing Cu2+ and Ni2+, H2S gas is passed after adding dil. HCl, which will precipitate out and why?
Answer:
Cu2+ ions will precipitate out because in the acidic medium only ionic product [Cu2+][S2-] exceeds the solubility product of CuS.

Question 24.
Why in Group V of qualitative analysis sufficient NH4OH solution should be added before adding (NH4)2CO3 solution?
Answer:
This is done to convert NH4HCO3 usually present in large amounts to (NH4)2CO3.
NH4HCO3 + NH4OH → (NH4)2CO3 + H2O.

Question 25.
The pH of an enzyme-catalyzed reaction has to be maintained between 7 and 8. What indicator should be used to monitor and control the pH?
Answer:
Bromothymol blue or phenol red or cresol red.

Question 26.
The ionization constant of formic acid is 1.8 × 10-4. Around what pH will its mixture with sodium formate give buffer solution of highest capacity?
Answer:
Buffer solution of highest capacity is formed at which
pH = PKa = – l0g 1.8 × 10-4 = 3.74.

Question 27.
Why PO4 ion is not amphiprotic?
Answer:
An amphiprotic ion is one that can donate proton as well as accept a proton. PO43- ion can accept a proton(s) but cannot donate any proton. Hence, PO43- is not amphiprotic.

Question 28.
In the reaction between BF3 and C2H5OC2H5 which one of them will act as an acid. Justify your answer.
Answer:
The reaction between BF3 and C2H5OC2H5 is
Equilibrium Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 7
As BF3 is electron-deficient and accepts a pair of electrons from C2H5OC2H5, hence BF3 is the Lewis acid.

Question 29.
Will the water be the same at 4°C and 25°C? Explain. [IIT 2003]
Answer:
No. the pH of water is not the same at 4°C and 25°C. This is because with an increase in temperature dissociation of H20 molecules increases. Hence concentration of [H+] ions will increase, i.e., pH will decrease. Thus pH of H2O at 4°C will be more than at 25°C.

Question 30.
What type of salts are Na2HPO3 and NaHS? [W.B. /EE 2003]
Answer:
Na2HPO3 is obtained by the reaction between NaOH and H3PO3 a dibasic acid.
Equilibrium Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 8
Both displaceable hydrogens are displaced by Na. No acidic hydrogen is left. Hence Na2HPO3 is a normal salt. NaHS is obtained by the replacement of one acidic hydrogen of H2S by Na (on reaction with NaOH)’. Hence NaHS is an acidic salt.

Question 31.
Explain why the pH of 0.1 molar solution of acetic acid will be higher than that of 0.1 molar solution of HCl.
Answer:
Acetic acid is a weak electrolyte. It is not completely ionized and hence gives less H+ ion concentration. HCl is a strong acid. It is completely ionized giving more H+ ions concentration. As pH = – log [H+], the lesser the no. of H+ ions, the more the value of pH. Therefore pH of 0.1 M acetic acid is more than that of 0.1 M HCl.

Question 32.
Benzoic acid is a monobasic acid. When 1.22 of its pure sample are dissolved in water and titrated against base 50 mL of 0.2 M NaOH are used up. Calculate the molar mass of benzoic acid.
Answer:
1000 ml of 1.0 M NaOH will neutralize acid
= \(\frac{1.22}{50 \times 0.2}\) × 1000 = 122 g.

But 1000 ml of 1.0 M NaOH contains 1 mole of NaOH and will neutralize 1 mole of monobasic acid. Hence the molar mass of benzoic acid is 122 g mol-1

Question 33.
Explain why ammonium chloride is acidic in liquid ammonia solvent.
Answer:
When NH4Cl is present in liquid ammonia, the following reaction takes place:
NH4 + NH3 ⇌ NH3 + NH4
Thus NH4Cl gives protons to liquid ammonia solvent.
Hence it is acidic.

Question 34.
Arrange the following in order of their increasing basicity.
H2O, OH̅, CH3OH, CH3 O̅.
Answer:
H2O < CH3OH < OH̅ < CH3 O̅.

Question 35.
The following can act both as Bronsted acid and Bronsted base. Write the formula in each case (of the product).
(i) HCO3-
Answer:
CO32-, H2CO3

(ii) H2PO4-
Answer:
HPO4, H3PO4

(iii) NH3
Answer:
NH̅2, NH4+

(iv) HS̅.
Answer:
S2-, H2S.

Question 36.
NaCl solution is added to a saturated solution of PbCl2. What will happen to the concentration of Pb2+ ions?
Answer:
Pb2+ ion concentration will decrease to keep K constant.

Question 37.
Which is a stronger base in each of the following pairs and why?
(i) H2O, Cl
Answer:
H2O is a stronger base being the conjugate base of a weak acid H3O+. Cl ion is the conjugate base of a strong acid and so is weak.

(ii) CH3COO, OH.
Answer:
OH is the stronger base, being the conjugate base of H2O a very weak acid.

Question 38.
For an aqueous solution of NH4Cl, prove that [H3O]+ = \(\sqrt{\mathbf{K}_{h} c}\) [CBSE PMT 2004]
Answer:
For salt of a strong acid weak base
Equilibrium Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 9

Question 39.
What are the conjugate bases of the following?
CH3OH, HN3, [Al(H2O)6]3+.
Answer:
CH3O (methoxide ion), N3 (azide ion), [Al(H2O)S(OH)]2+.

Question 40.
Write reaction for autoprotolysis of water. How is the ionic product of water-related to ionization constant of water? Derive the relationship.
Answer:
Autoprotolysis of H2O takes place as follows:
Equilibrium Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 10

Question 41.
Glycine is an a-aminoacid that exists in the form of Zwitter ion as NH3CH2OO̅. Write the formula of its conjugate acid and conjugate base.
Answer:
Equilibrium Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 11

Equilibrium Important Extra Questions Long Answer Type

Question 1.
Explain chemical equilibrium with th^ help of an example of formation and decomposition of hydrogen iodide.
Answer:
Consider the reaction between hydrogen and iodide at a constant temperature of 720 K in a closed vessel. The reaction involved is:
H2(g) + I2(g) → 2HI(g)

Accordingly, the effective collision amongst the reactant molecules will result in the production of HI. Since the product molecules are not permitted to leave the vessel (i.e., the reaction is carried out in a closed vessel), they will also collide amongst themselves leading to the formation of reactant molecules. Under these conditions, the reaction takes place in both directions. Hence, it is called a reversible reaction.
Equilibrium Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 12
Graphical representation of the change of reaction rates with time for the formation and decomposition of hydrogen iodide

Forward reaction: H2 (g) + I2 (g) → 2HI (g)
Backward reaction: 2HI (g) → H2 (g) + I2 (g)
Reversible reaction: H2 (g) + I2 (g) ⇌ 2HI (g).

To begin with, with the concentration of the reactants being higher in comparison to the product molecules, the rate of the forward reaction will be high as compared to the backward reaction. As the reaction proceeds further, the molar concentration of the reactants will gradually decrease while that of the product will gradually increase.

Apparently, the rate of forwarding reaction goes on decreasing while that of the backward reaction. This state is the reversible chemical reaction is called a chemical equilibrium state.

Question 2.
Name and explain the factors which influence the equilibrium state.
Answer:
The various factors which influence the equilibrium state are:
1. Concentration: Concentration change influences the equilibrium state. If the concentration of the reactants is increased, the equilibrium will shift in such a direction in which more to the products are formed and vice-versa.
On the other hand, if the concentration of the products is increased, the equilibrium will shift in such a direction in which more of the reactants are formed.

2. Temperature: Like concentration, the temperature change also affects the equilibrium state. An increase in temperature of the system will shift the equilibrium in such a direction in which heat is absorbed (i.e. rate of endothermic reaction will increase).

On the other hand, a decrease in temperature of the system will shift the equilibrium in such a direction in which heat is evolved (i.e., rate of exothermic reaction will increase).

3. Pressure: Like concentration and temperature, the pressure also influences the equilibrium state only when the reaction proceeds with a change in volume. An increase in pressure of the system will shift the equilibrium in such a direction in which the volume of the system decreases.

On the other hand, a decrease in pressure of the system will shift the equilibrium in such a direction in which the volume of the system increases.

To explain the effect of temperature, pressure, and concentration on the equilibrium state, consider the combination of N2 and H2 to form NH3
N2 (g) + 3H2 (g) ⇌ 2NH3 (g); ΔH = – 93.6 kJ

The reaction is reversible, exothermic, and accompanied by a decrease in volume.
Effect of temperature: According to Le-Chatelier’s principle, an increase in temperature shifts the equilibrium in the direction in which heat is absorbed, and a decrease in temperature shifts the equilibrium in the direction in which heat is evolved. Since the formation of ammonia is accompanied by the evolution of heat, it is favored by a decrease in temperature.

Effect of pressure: According to Le-Chatelier’s principle, an increase of pressure on a system in equilibrium, favors the direction which is accompanied by a decrease in volume and vice-versa. While going from, left to right in the above reaction, there is a decrease in the number of moles or say volume, the formation of ammonia is favored by an increase in pressure.

Effect of concentration: According to Le-Chatelier’s principle, an increase of concentration of any of the substances in the system shifts the equilibrium in the direction in which the concentration of that substance is reduced. Thus, the addition of N2 or H2 favors the formation of ammonia.

Question 3.
What is salt hydrolysis? Explain hydrolysis of salts of
(i) strong acids and strong bases
(ii) strong acids and weak bases
(iii) strong bases and weak acids
(iv) strong acids and weak bases.
Answer:
Salt hydrolysis: Hydrolysis is a process in which a salt reacts with water to form acid and base.
Salt + Water ⇌ Acid + Base
B A + H2O ⇌ HA + BOH

That is the interaction of the cations of the salt with OH ions furnished by water and anions of the salt with H+ ions furnished by water to form an acidic or basic solution is called salt hydrolysis.
(i) Salts of strong acids and strong bases like NaCl, KCl, KNO3 NaNO3, Na2SO4, K2SO4 do not undergo hydrolysis because the acids an.d bases furnished by them in aqueous solutions are strong acids and strong bases which are completely dissociated.
NaCl + H2O ⇌ NaOH + HCl
NaOH (aq) ⇌ Na+ + OH
HCl (Aq) ⇌ H+ + Cl

Since [H+] = [OH] the resulting solution is neutral and its pH = 7.

(iii) Hydrolysis of salts of strong acids and weak bases:
The salts belonging to this type are NH4NO3, NH4Cl, (NH4)2SO4, CuSO4, AlCl3, Ca(NO3)2, etc.

Let us take the case of NH4NO3
NH4NO3 + H2O ⇌ NH4OH + HNO3
NH4+ + NO3 + H2O ⇌ NH4OH + HNO3
or
NH4+ + H2O ⇌ NH4OH + H+

The resulting solution after hydrolysis is basic (pH > 7). Since only the anions of the salt have taken place in the hydrolysis, it is called anionic hydrolysis.

(iv) Hydrolysis of salts of weak acids and weak bases:
The salts belonging to this type are:
CH3COONH4, (NH4)2CO3, Ca3(PO4)2 etc.

Let us take the case of hydrolysis of CH3COONH4
CH3COONH4 + H3O ⇌ CH3COOH + NH4OH
or
CH3COO̅ + NH4 + H2O ⇌ CH3COOH + NH4OH

Since both the cations and anions of the salt have participated in the hydrolysis, it is known as cationic as well as anionic hydrolysis. The nature of the solution or pH depends upon the relative strengths of the acid and base that are formed on hydrolysis.

Equilibrium Important Extra Questions Numerical Problems

Question 1.
Calculate the pH of \(\frac{N}{1000}\) sodium hydroxide solution assuming complete ionisation (Kw = 1.0 × 10-14).
Answer:
Since NaOH is completely ionized
∴ [NaOH] = [OH] = 10-3 N = 10-3 M

Now [H2O+][OH] = Kw = 10-14 [Given]
∴ [H3O+] = \(\frac{\mathrm{K}_{w}}{\left[\mathrm{OH}^{-}\right]}=\frac{10^{-14}}{10^{-3}}\) = 10-11
pH = – log [H3O+] = – log 10-11 = 11.

Question 2.
Calculate the pH of a 0.01 N solution of acetic acid. Ka for acetic acid is 1.8 × 10-5 at 25°C.
Answer:
Equilibrium Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 13
Applying the law of chemical equilibrium
Ka = [CH3COO̅][H3O+]/[CH3COOH]
Equilibrium Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 14

Question 3.
Calculate the pH value of a solution of 0.1 M NH3 (Kb = 1.8 × 10-5). ,
Answer:
NH3 H2O ⇌ NH4+ + OH
Equilibrium Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 15

Question 4.
Equal volumes of solutions with pH = 4 and pH = 10 are mixed. Calculate the pH of the resulting solution?
Answer:
pH = 4
∴ [H3O+] = 10-4 M

pH = 10
∴ [H3O+] = 10-10 M
or [OH] = 10-4 M
Thus, they will exactly neutralize each other, and the pH of the resulting solution will be = 7.

Question 5.
An aqueous solution of 0.02 g of NaOH in 50 mL has been prepared. What is its pH and pOH.
Answer:
50 mL of NaOH contains 0.02 g of it
1000 mL of it contains = \(\frac{0.02}{50}\) × 1000 = 0.4 g

Strength of NaOH = 0.4 gL-1
Equilibrium Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 16

Question 6.
A reaction mixture containing N2 at 0.50 atm, H2 at 3.0 atm and NH3 at 0.50 atm is heated to 450°C, in which direction the reaction N2 (g) + 3H2 (g) ⇌ 2NH3 (g) will go if Kp = 4.28 × 10-5?
Answer:
Concentration quotient Q = \(\frac{p^{2} \mathrm{NH}_{3}}{p_{\mathrm{N}_{2}} \times p_{\mathrm{H}_{2}}^{3}}=\frac{(0.50)^{2}}{0.5 \times(3.0)^{3}}\) = 0.018

Kp = 4.28 × 10-5
As Q > > Kp reaction will go in the backward direction.

Question 7.
Under what pressure must an equimolar mixture of PCl3 and Cl2 be placed at 250°C in order to obtain PCl5 at 1 atm > Kp for dissociation of PCl5 = 1.78.
Answer:
Let partial pressure of PCl3 at eqbm. = p atm
Then partial pressure of Cl2 at eqbm. = p atm
Partial pressure of PCl5 at eqbm. = 1 atm

Then for PCl5 ⇌ PCl3 + Cl2
Equilibrium Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 17
Equilibrium Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 18
∴ Total initial pressure of PCl3 and Cl2 = 2.33 + 2.33 = 4.66 atm.

Question 8.
At 773 K, the equilibrium constant Kc for the reaction N2 (g) + 3H2 (g) ⇌ 2NH3 (g) is 6.02 × 10-2 L2 mol-2. Calculate the value of Kp at the same temperature.
Answer:
Equilibrium Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 19

Question 9.
Kp for the reaction N2 (g) + 3H2 (g) ⇌ 2NH3 (g) is 49 at a certain temperature. Calculate the value of Kp at the same
temperature for the reaction NH3 ⇌ \(\frac{1}{2}\)N2 + \(\frac{3}{2}\)H2 (g)
Answer:
Given for the reaction N2 (g) + 3H2 (g) ⇌ 2NH3 (g), Kp = 49
∴ for the reverse reaction 2NH3 (g) ⇌ N2 (g) + 3H2 (g)
Equilibrium Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 20

Question 10.
In the equilibrium CaCO3 (s) ⇌ CaO (s) + CO2 (g) at 1073 K, the pressure of CO2 is formed to be 2.5 × 104 Pa. What is the equilibrium constant for this reaction at 1073 K.
Answer:
With reference to the standard state pressure of 1 bar which is = 105 Pa
Equilibrium Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 21

Question 11.
Determine the concentration of CO2 which will be in equilibrium with 2.5 × 10-2, mol L-1 of CO at 100°C for the reaction FeO (s) + CO (g) ⇌ Fe (s) + CO2 (g); Kc = 5.0.
Answer:
Kc = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{CO}_{2}\right]}{[\mathrm{CO}]}\)
i.e., 5 = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{CO}_{2}\right]}{2.5 \times 10^{-2}}\)
or
[CO2] = 5 × 2.5 × 10-2 = 12.5 × 10-2 mol L-1

Question 12.
In a reaction between hydrogen and iodine, 6.34 moles of hydrogen and 4.02 moles of iodine are found to be in equilibrium with 42.85 moles of hydrogen iodide at 350°C. Calculate the equilibrium constant.
Answer:
Equilibrium Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 22

Question 13.
Prove that the pressure necessary to obtain 50% dissociation of PCl5 at 500 K is numerically equal to the three times the value of the equilibrium constant, Kp.
Answer:
Equilibrium Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 23
Total no. of moles = 1.5
If P is the total required pressure, then
Equilibrium Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 24

Question 14.
The equilibrium constant for the reaction A2 + B2 ⇌ 2AB is Kp. What will be the equilibrium constant for the reaction AB ⇌ \(\frac{1}{2}\)A2 + \(\frac{1}{2}\) B22? [A, B and AB are all gases] [WB JEE 2004]
Answer:
For A2 + B2 ⇌ 2AB, eqbm. constant = Kp
For the reverse reaction 2AB ⇌ A2 + B2 eqmb. constant = \(\frac{1}{\mathbf{K}_{p}}\)

On dividing by 2, AB ⇌ \(\frac{1}{2}\)A2 + \(\frac{1}{2}\)B2
eqbm. constant = \(\sqrt{\frac{1}{K_{p}}}\)

Question 15.
The concentration of hydronium ions in a cup of black coffee is 1.3 × 10-5 M. Find the pH of the coffee. Is this coffee acidic or alkaline?
Answer:
Here, given [H3O+] = 1.3 × 10-5 M
pH = – log [H3O+] = – log (1.3 × 10-5-5)
= 5 – log 1.3 = 5 – 0.1139 = 4.8861
As pH is less than 7, the black coffee is acidic.

Question 16.
A solution is found to contain 0.63 g of nitric acid in 100 mL of the solution. What is the pH of the solution.
Answer:
HNO3 → H+ + NO3 completely
∴ [HNO3] = [H+] as nitric acid is a strong acid.
Cone, of HNO3 = 0.63 g per 100 mL

Strength L-1 = 6.3
[HNO3] = \(\frac{6.3}{63}\) = 0.1 = 10-1 M
∴ [H+] = 10-1 M
∴ pH = – log 10-1 = 1.

Question 17.
The value of Kw is 9.55 × 10-14 at a certain temperature. Calculate the pH of water at this temperature.
Answer:
Kw = 9.55 × 10-14
Now for water [H3O+] = [OH]
∴ Kw = [H3O+] × [OH] = [H3O+]2
or
[H3O+] = \(\sqrt{\mathrm{K}_{w}}=\sqrt{9.55 \times 10^{-14}}\) = 3.09 × 10-7M
pH = – log (3.09 × 10-7) = – (- 7 – log 3.09) = 7 – log 3.09 = 7 – 0.49 = 6.51

Question 18.
Calculate the mass of HCl to be dissolved per litre of the solution so that its pH = 1.301.
pH = – log [H3O+]
[H3+O] = antulog (- 1.301) = antilog 2.699
= 5.0 × 10-2 × 36.5 gL-1 = 1.825 gL-1

Question 19.
Calculate the pH of 0 001 N H2SO4 solution.
Answer:
H2SO4 is completely ionised as
H2SO4 + 2H2O ⇌ 2H3O+ + SO42- as it is, a strong acid.
[H3O+] = 2[H2SO4] as one molecule of H2SO4 gives 2 H3O+ ions

But H2SO4 is given to be 0.001 N = 0.001 × 49 g L-1 [Eq. wt of H2SO4 = 49]
Equilibrium Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 25

Question 20.
What would be the pH of a solution obtained by mixing 100 mL of 0.1 NHCl and 9.9 mL of 1.0 N NaOH solution?
Answer:
100 mL of 0.1 N HCl = 100 × 0.1 = 10 millieq.
9.9 mL of 1 N NaOH = 9.9 × 1 = 9.9 millieq.
∴ HCl left unneutralized = 10 – 9.9 = 0.1 millieq
Volume of solution = 100 + 9.9 = 109.9 mL

Normality of resulting HCl solution
= \(\frac{0.1}{109.9}=\frac{0.1}{110}\) = 0.09 × 10-4 N

Molarity = 9.09 × 10-4 M = [H+] = [HCl]
pH = – log(9.09 × 10-4) = 3.05

Question 21.
Calculate the pH of 10-8 M HCl solution.
Answer:
From acid [H+] = 10-8 M as HCl is completely ionised
Now the concentration of [H+] = 10-7 M cannot be ignored as compared to [H+] = 10-8 M from HCl as HCl is very dilute solution.

∴ Total [H+] = 10-8 + 10-7 = 10-8(1 + 10)
= 11 × 10-8 M
pH = – log (11 × 10-8) = 8 – log 11
= 8 – 1.04 = 6.96.

Question 22.
Calculate the hydrolysis constant and degree of hydrolysis and pH of 0.10 M KCN solution at 25°C. Ka for HCN = 6.2 × 10-10.
Answer:
KCN is the salt of a weak acid HCN and strong base KOH
∴ Kh = Hydrolysis constant
Equilibrium Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 26
The hydrolysis reaction of KCN is
Equilibrium Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 27

Question 23.
Calculate the pH of 0.01 M solution of NH4CN. Given that the Ka for HCN = 6.2 × 10-10 and Kb for NH3 = 1.6 /10“5.
Answer:
Applying the formula
PH = 7+ [pKa – pKb] = 7 + [- log Ka + log Kb]
= 7 + \(\frac{1}{2}\)[- log (6.2 × 10-10) + log (1.6 × 10-5)]
= 7+ \(\frac{1}{2}\)[(10- 0.7924) + (5 – 0.2041)]
pH = 9,31

Question 24.
The solubility product of AgCl in water is 1.5 × 10-10. Calculate its solubility in 0.01 M NaCl solution.
Answer:
As NaCl dissociates completely
∴ [NaCl] = [Cl] = 0.01 M

If solubility of AgCl in 0.01 M is s mol L-1, then
[Ag+] = [Cl] = s mol L-1

∴ Total [Cl] = 0.01 + s ≈ 0.01 M
Ksp for AgCl = [Ag+][Cl- ] = s × 0.01 = 0.01 s

∴ 0.01 s = 1.5 × 10-10
s = 1.5 × 10-8 M.

Question 25.
Given that the solubility product of BaSO4 is 1 × 10-10. Will a precipitate form when
(i) Equal volumes of 2 × 10-3 M BaCl2 solution and 2 × 10-4 M NaSO4 solutions are mixed?
Answer:
BaCl2 ionizes completely in solution
Equilibrium Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 28
Ionic product of BaSO4 = [Ba++][SO4]
= 10-3 × 10-4 = 10-7

As Ionic product 10-7 is > Ksp 1 × 10-10
Hence a precipitate of BaSO4 will be formed.

(ii) Equal volumes of 2 × 10-8 M BaCl2 solution and × 2 × 10-3 M Na2SO4 solutions are mixed?
Answer:
Similarly [Ba++] = \(\frac{2 \times 10^{-8}}{2}\) = 10-8 M
[SO4] = \(\frac{2 \times 10^{-3}}{2}\) = 10-3

Ionic product of BaSO4 = 108 × 10 = 10-11
It is less than the solubility product Ksp × 1 × 10-10
Hence, no precipitate will be formed in this case.

CBSE Sample Papers for Class 11 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions

Students can access the CBSE Sample Papers for Class 11 Accountancy with Solutions and marking scheme Term 2 Set 2 will help students in understanding the difficulty level of the exam.

CBSE Sample Papers for Class 11 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions

Time : 2 Hours
Maximum Marks: 40

General Instructions:

  • The Question Paper consists of two Parts – A and B. There are total 12 questions. All questions are compulsory.
  • Part – A consists of Accounting Process.
  • Part – B consists of Financial Accounting and Computers in Accounts.
  • Question Nos. 1 to 2 and 5 to 6 are short answer type questions – I carrying 2 Marks each.
  • Question Nos. 3 and 7 to 9 are short answer type questions – II carrying 3 Marks each.
  • Questions Nos. 4 and 10 to 12 are long answer type questions carrying 5 marks each.
  • There is no overall choice. However, an internal choice has been provided in 3 questions of three marks and 1 question of five marks.

Part-A (12 marks)
Accounting Process

Question 1.
Calculate the due dates of the following bills: [2]

Date of Bill Period
(a) 29th January 2020 1 month
(b) 23rd December 2020 60 days
(c) 13th April 2020 3 months
(d) 10th January 2019 2 months

Answer:
(a) 29th Jan + 1 months + 3 days = 3rd March 2020
(b) 23rd Dec + 60 days + 3 days = 21st February 2021
(c) 13th April + 3 months + 3 days = 16lhAugust 2020
(d) 10th Jan + 2 months + 3 days = 13th March 2019

CBSE Sample Papers for Class 11 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions

Question 2.
The following is the Trial Balance of Thakur Bros, as at 28th February 2018:
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 11 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 1
The following transactions were recorded during the month of March 2018 :
(a) Credit purchase of goods ₹ 2,20,000
(b) Credit sales of goods ₹ 3,75,000
(c) Purchase Return ₹ 15,000
(d) Sales Return ₹ 10,000
You are required to prepare the Trial Balance as on 31st March 2018. [2]
Answer:
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 11 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 2

Commonly Made Errors: Students tend to subtract the Sales return and Purchase Return from the Sales and purchases respectively.

Answering Tip: Students need to keep in mind the journal entries of the returns and see the accounts affected by the transactions.

CBSE Sample Papers for Class 11 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions

Percent yield calculator is online tool that finds the percent yield for the given amount of actual yield calculator and theoretical yield.

Question 3.
On 1st October, 2014, ₹ sells goods to Y for ₹ 25,000 and draws two bills of exchange on him: the first for ? 10,000 for two months and second for ₹ 15,000 for 3 months. Y accepts and returns these bills to ₹. Both the bills are sent to the bank for collection. In due course, ₹ receives the information from the bank that the bill for ₹ 10,000 has been duly met and the other bill for ₹ 15,000 has been dishonoured. Noting charges paid on the dishonour of the second bill are ₹100. Pass Journal entries in the books of ₹. [3]
OR
A purchased goods for ₹ 15,000 from B on 1st March. 2013 and gives him two Bills. One for ₹ 10,000 at two months and other for ₹ 5000 at four months. A meet the first bill at maturity but on 25th June, 2013 he was declared insolvent and 60 paise in a rupee amount was received from him on August 20,2013. Journalise in the books of B and prepare A’s A/c. [3]
Answer:
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 11 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 3
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 11 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 4
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 11 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 5

Commonly Made Errors: On the payment of second bill, some students debit the unreceived amount to discount A/c.

Answering Tip: Since A has been declared insolvent, the amount not received from him becomes unrecoverable. Therefore, this amount is to be debited to Bad debts A/c.

CBSE Sample Papers for Class 11 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions

Question 4.
Rectify the following errors through Journal entries and also show the wrong entries passed:
(i) An amount of ₹ 4,500 spent for the extension of machinery has been debited to Wages Account.
(ii) ₹ 150 paid as cartage for the newly purchased furniture, posted to Cartage Account.
(iii) A builder’s bill for ₹ 3,000 for erection of a small cycle shed was debited to Repairs Account.
(iv) A cheque of ₹ 1,500 received from Komal was dishonoured and had been posted to the debit side of ‘Allowance A/c’.
(v) ₹ 750 paid for the newly purchased ‘Fan’ posted to Purchase Account. (RD [5]
Answer:
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 11 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 6
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 11 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 7

Commonly Made Errors:

  • Students debit the Office expenseaccount instead of furniture and fixtures A/c in the rectification entry for purchase of fan.
  • Students tend to debit Bank A/c for rectifying the entry of the dishonour of cheque.

Answering Tips

  • As purchase of fan is a part of office fixtures, so it will be rectified by debiting the furniture and fixtures A/c.
  • When Cheque received is dishonoured, the account of the person from whom the cheque was received is debited.

CBSE Sample Papers for Class 11 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions

Part-B (28 marks)
(Financial Accounting and Computer In Accounts)

Question 5.
Operating profit earned by M/s Arora and Sachdeva in 2013-14 was ₹ 17,00,000. Its non-operating incomes were ₹ 1,50,000 and non-operating expenses were ₹ 3,75,000. Calculate the amount of net profit earned by the firm. [2]
Answer:
Net Profit = Operating Profit + Non- operating Income – Non-operating Expenses
= ₹ 17,00,000 + ₹ 1,50,000 – ₹ 3,75,000 = ₹ 14,75,000
Net profit earned by M/S Arora and Sachdeva in 2005-06 was ₹ 14,75,000.

Question 6.
From the following information, calculate capital at the beginning: [2]

Capital at the end of the year 4,00,000
Drawings made during the year 60,000
Fresh Capital introduced during the year 1,00,000
Profit of the current year 80,000

Answer:
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 11 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 8

Question 7.
Briefly discuss the functional components of a computer system. [3]
OR
Differentiate between Manual and Computerised Accounting System.
Answer:
A computer is a combination of hardware and software resources which integrate together and provide various functionalities to the user. Hardware is the physical component of a computer like the processor, memory devices, monitor, keyboard etc. while software is the set of programs or instructions that are required by the hardware resources to function properly. There are a few basic components that aids the working-cycle of a computer i.e. the Input- Process- Output Cycle and these are called as the functional components of a computer. It needs certain input, processes that input and produces the desired output. The input unit takes the input, the central processing unit does the processing of data and the output unit produces the output. The memory unit holds the data and instructions during the processing.

OR
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 11 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 9

CBSE Sample Papers for Class 11 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions

Question 8.
Hari maintains his books of account on single entry system. His books provide the following information:

Particulars Jan. 1,2012 (₹) Dec. 31,2012 (₹)
Furniture 200 200
Stock 2,800 3,050
Sundry Debtors 2,100 3,400
Cash 150 200
Sundry Creditors 1,750 1,900
Bills Receivable 300
Loan 500
Investments 1,000

His drawings during the year were ₹ 500.
Depredate furniture by 10% and provide a reserve forbad debts at 10% on sundry debtors. Calculate profit or loss earned by the firm. [3]
OR
Ronak, who keeps his books on Single Entry System, has his capital on 31st March, 2016, ₹ 1,20,000 and on 1st April, 2015 was ₹ 1,16,700. He further informs that during the year, he withdrew for his personal expenses ₹ 19,400. He also sold his personal investment of ₹ 1,10,000 at 5% premium and brought that money into the business. Prepare a statement of Profit or Loss. [3]
Answer:
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 11 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 10
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 11 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 11

OR

CBSE Sample Papers for Class 11 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 12

CBSE Sample Papers for Class 11 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions

Question 9.
Give Journal Entries for the following Adjustments in final accounts assuming CGST and SGST @9% each:
(A) Salaries ₹ 5,000 are outstanding.
(B) Insurance amounting to ₹ 2,000 is paid in advance
(C) ₹ 4,000 for rent have been received in advance.
(D) Commission earned but not yet received ₹ 1,000. [3]
Answer:
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 11 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 13

Commonly Made Errors: Students calculate GST for Salaries and Prepaid Insurance and Rent.

Answering Tip: Students need to recall that GST is not levied on Salaries and GST is not accounted on Prepaid expenses.

Question 10.
The following is the statement of affairs of Avinash as on 1st April 2014:
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 11 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 14
His position on 31st March 2015 are:
Cash in Hand ₹ 3,000; Cash at Bank ₹ 5,000; Stock ₹ 44,000; Debtors ₹ 21,000; Fixed Assets ₹ 80,000; Creditors ₹ 22,000.
You are informed that Avinash has taken stocks worth ₹ 4,500 for his private use and that he has been regularly transferring ₹ 2,000 per month from his business banking account by way of drawings. Out of his drawings, he spent ₹ 15,000 for purchasing a scooter for the business on 1st October 2017.
You are requested to find out his profit or loss and also prepare the Statement of Affairs after considering the following:
(a) Depreciate Fixed Assets and Scooter by 10% p.a.
(b) Write Bad-debts ₹ 1,000 and provide 5% for doubtful debts on Sundry Debtors.
(c) Commission earned but not received by him was ₹ 2,500.
Answer:
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 11 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 15
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 11 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 16
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 11 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 17

Working capital:
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 11 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 18

CBSE Sample Papers for Class 11 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions

Question 11.
The following balance was extracted from the books of M/s Panchsheel Garments on March 31st, 2014.
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 11 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 19
Prepare the trading and profit and loss account for the year ended March 31st, 2014 and a balance sheet as on that date taking into account the following information:
(i) Unexpired insurance ₹ 1,000.
(ii) Salary due but not paid 1,800.
(iii) Wages outstanding 200.
(iv) Interest on capital @ 5%.
(v) Scooter is depreciated @ 5%.
(vi) Furniture is depreciated @ 10%.
(vii) Closing stock was valued at ₹ 15,000. {5]
OR
From the following balances of M/s Nilu Sarees as on March 31,2014. Prepare Trading and Profit and Loss account and balance sheet as on date.
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 11 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 20
Stock as on March 31st, 2011 ₹ 22,000.
Answer:
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 11 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 21
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 11 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 22

Working Note:

  • Calculation of Interest on capital: 5% of ₹ 50,000 = ₹ 2,500
  • Calculation of Depreciation on Scooter: 5% of ₹ 8,000 = ₹ 400
  • Calculation of Depreciation on Furniture: 10% of ₹ 5,200 = ₹ 520

OR

CBSE Sample Papers for Class 11 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 23
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 11 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 24
Note: The balance of suspense account has been given in the credit side of the trial balance, hence is to be transferred to the liabilities side of the balance sheet.

CBSE Sample Papers for Class 11 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions

Question 12.
Jagdish the new accounting manager wants to install the Accounting software for accounting to help his company in making the accounts faster. His C.E.O wants him to give a presentation in the board meeting. State the advantages of using Accounting Information System, that Jagdish can use in his presentation. [5]
Answer:
The advantages of using computerized accounting software are:
1. Automation: Since all the calculations are handled by the software, computerized accounting eliminates many of the mundane and time-consuming processes associated with manual accounting. For example, once issued, invoices are processed automatically making accounting less time-consuming.

2. Accuracy: This accounting system is designed to be accurate to the minutest detail. Once the data is entered into the system, all the calculations, including additions and subtractions, are done automatically by software.

3. Data Access: Using accounting software, it becomes much easier for different individuals to access accounting data outside of the office, securely. This is particularly true if an online accounting solution is being used.

4. Reliability: Because the calculations are so accurate, the financial statements prepared by computers are highly reliable.

5. Scalable: When a company grows, the amount of accounting necessary not only increases but becomes more complex. With computerized accounting, everything is kept straight forward. because shifting through data using software is easier than shifting through a bunch of papers.

6. Speed: Using accounting software, the entire process of preparing accounts becomes faster. Further more, statements and reports can be generated instantly at the dick of a button. Managers do not have to wait for hours, even days, to lay their hands on an important report.

7. Security: The latest data can be saved and stored in off-site locations, so it is safe from natural and man-made disasters like earthquakes, fires, floods and terrorist attacks. In case of a disaster, the system can be quickly restored on other computers. This level of precaution is taken by Clever Accounting.

8. Cost-effective: Since using computerized accounting is more efficient than paper-based accounting, work will be done faster and time will be saved. When one considers, Clever Accounting, one of the latest online accounting solutions, which starts at a low monthly subscription, then computerized accounting really becomes a no-brainer.

9. Visuals: Viewing your accounts using a computer allows you to take advantage of the option to view your data in different formats. You can view data in tables and using different types of charts.

Solutions Class 12 Important Extra Questions Chemistry Chapter 2

Here we are providing Class 12 Chemistry Important Extra Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Solutions. Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions are the best resource for students which helps in Class 12 board exams.

Class 12 Chemistry Chapter 2 Important Extra Questions Solutions

Solutions Important Extra Questions Very Short Answer Type

Question 1.
What is meant by reverse osmosis? (CBSE 2011)
Answer:
The direction of osmosis can be reversed if a pressure larger than the osmotic pressure is applied to the solution side through the semi-permeable membrane.

Question 2.
Define an ideal solution and write one of its characteristics. (CBSE Delhi 2014)
Answer:
An ideal solution may be defined as the solution which obeys Raoult’s law exactly over the entire range of temperature and pressure. For ideal solution

  • Heat of mixing is zero
  • Volume change of mixing is zero.

Therefore first find the number of moles of each compound present and then use the mole fraction equation.

Question 3.
(i) Write the colligative property which is used to find the molecular mass of macromolecules.
(ii) In non-ideal solution, what type of deviation shows the formation of minimum boiling azeotropes? (CBSE Delhi 2016)
Answer:
(i) Osmotic pressure
(ii) Minimum boiling azeotropes show positive deviation from Raoult’s law.

How to find molar concentration with density how to calculate molarity of liquid solutions tank mixing problem dilution of two solutes

Question 4.
What is the relation between normality and molarity of a given solution of sulphuric acid?
Answer:
Normality = 2 × Molarity.

Question 5.
Given below is the sketch of a plant for carrying out a process.
Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solution 1
(i) Name the process occurring in the above plant.
(ii) To which container does the net flow of solvent take place?
(iii) Name one SPM which can be used in this plant.
(iv) Give one practical use of the plant. (CBSE Sample Paper 2007)
Answer:
(i) Reverse osmosis
(ii) To fresh water container
(iii) Film of cellulose acetate
(iv) This can be used as a desalination plant to meet potable water requirements.

Free Molarity Calculator Chemistry determines the molarity of the chemical solution in a short span of time.

Question 6.
A and B liquids on mixing produce a warm solution. Which type of deviation from Raoult’s law is there? (CBSE Sample Paper 2011)
Answer:
Negative deviation.

Question 7.
Define ebullioscopic constant. (CBSE AI 2011)
Answer:
Ebullioscopic constant is the elevation in boiling point of a solution containing 1 mole of solute dissolved in 1000 g of the solvent.

This colloid osmotic pressure calculator determines the pressure induced by proteins in blood plasma.

Question 8.
What are isotonic solutions?
Answer:
The solutions having same osmotic pressure at the same temperature are called isotonic solutions. These have equimolar concentrations at same temperature.

Question 9.
Some liquids on mixing form ‘azeotropes’. What are ‘azeotropes’?
Answer:
The solutions (liquid mixtures) which boil at constant temperature and can distil unchanged in composition are called azeotropes or azeotropic mixtures.

Question 10.
Define‘colligative properties’
Answer:
Colligative properties are those properties of solutions which depend only on the number of solute particles and not on the nature of the solute.

Question 11.
Define ‘Molality (m)’.
Answer:
Molality is the number of moles of solute dissolved per 1000 g (or 1 kg) of the solvent.

Question 12.
Define ‘Ideal solution’.
Answer:
The solutions which obey Raoult’s law over the entire range of concentration are called ideal solutions.

Question 13.
Define ‘Abnormal molar mass’.
Answer:
Molar mass of a substance, calculated based on its colligative properties, may not be correct if the solute particles undergo dissociation or association in the solution. Molar mass thus calculated is called abnormal molar mass.

Solutions Important Extra Questions Short Answer Type

Question 1.
State Raoult’s law for a solution containing volatile components. Write two characteristics of the solution which obeys Raoult’s law at all concentrations. (CBSE Delhi 2019)
Answer:
Raoult’s law states that at a given temperature, the partial vapour pressure of any volatile component of a solution is equal to the product of the vapour pressure of the pure component and its mole fraction in the solution.

  • No heat is evolved or absorbed when these components are mixed to form a solution.
  • Volume of the solution is exactly same as the sum of the volumes of the components.

Question 2.
Define the terms ‘osmosis’ and ‘osmotic pressure’. What is the advantage of using osmotic pressure as compared to other colligative properties for the determination of molar masses of solutes in solutions? (CBSE 2010)
Answer:
The flow of solvent from solution of low concentration to higher concentration through a semipermeable membrane is called osmosis.
The excess pressure which must be applied to a solution to prevent the passage of solvent through a semi-permeable membrane is called osmotic pressure. Osmotic pressure measurement is preferred over all other colligative properties because
1. even in dilute solutions, the osmotic pressure values are appreciably high and can be measured accurately.
2. osmotic pressure can be measured at room temperature. On the other hand, elevation in boiling point is measured at high temperature where the solute may decompose. The depression in freezing point is measured at low temperatures.

Question 3.
State the following:
(i) Raoult’s law in its general form in reference to solutions.
(ii) Henry’s law about partial pressure of a gas in a mixture. (CBSE 2011)
Answer:
(i) For a solution of volatile liquids, at a given temperature, the partial vapour pressure of each component in solution is equal to the product of vapour pressure of the pure component and its mole fraction.

(ii) Henry’s law states that the mass of a gas dissolved per unit volume of the solvent at a constant temperature is directly proportional to the pressure of the gas in equilibrium with the solution.

Question 4.
The experimentally determined molar mass for what type of substances is always lower than the true value when water is used as solvent? Explain. Give one example of such a substance and one example of a substance which does not show a large variation from the true value. (CBSE Sample Paper 2019)
Answer:
Ionic compounds when dissolved in water dissociate into cations and anions. When there is dissociation of solute into ions, in dilute solutions, the number of particles increases if we ignore the interionic interactions.

As the value of the colligative properties depends on the number of particles of the solute, the experimentally observed value of colligative property will be higher than the true value. Therefore the experimentally determined molar mass is always lower than the true value.

If we dissolve KCl in water, the experimentally determined molar mass is always lower than the true value. Glucose (non-electrolyte) does not show a large variation from the true value.

Question 5.
What mass of ethylene glycol (molar mass = 62.0 g mol-1) must be added to 5.50 kg of water to lower the freezing point of water from 0 to – 10.0°0 (kf for water = 1.86 K kg mol-1). (CBSE 2010)
Answer:
ΔTf = \(\frac{\mathrm{K}_{f} \times 1000 \times \mathrm{w}_{\mathrm{B}}}{\mathrm{w}_{\mathrm{A}} \times \mathrm{M}_{\mathrm{B}}}\)
Kf = 1.86 K kg mol-1, wA = 5.50 kg = 5500 g
WB = ?
MB = 62.0 g/mol, ΔTf = 0 – (- 10) = 10°C
10 = \(\frac{1.86 \times 1000 \times w_{B}}{5500 \times 62}\)
WB = \(\frac{10 \times 5500 \times 62}{1.86 \times 1000}\) = 1833.3 g = 1.833 kg

Question 6.
15.0 g of an unknown molecular material was dissolved in 450 g of water. The resulting solution was found to freeze at – 0.34°C. What is the molar mass of this material? (kf for water = 1.86 K kg mol-1) (CBSE Delhi 2012)
Answer:
Molecular mass, MB is
MB = \(\frac{\mathrm{K}_{f} \times \mathrm{w}_{\mathrm{B}} \times 1000}{\mathrm{w}_{\mathrm{A}} \times \Delta \mathrm{T}_{f}}\)
ΔTf = 0 – (- 0.34) = 0.34°,
Kf = 1.86 K Kg mol-1, wB = 15.0 g, WA = 450 g
MB = \(\frac{1.86 \times 15.0 \times 1000}{450 \times 0.34}\) = 182.3 g/mol

Question 7.
State Henry’s law and write its two applications. (CBSE Delhi 2019)
Answer:
Henry’s law states that the mole fraction of the gas in the solution is directly proportional to the partial pressure of the gas over the solution.
P = KH.X
Applications of Henry’s law

  • In the production of carbonated beverages.
  • In deep sea diving (scuba diving)

Question 8.
A solution of glycerol (C3H8O3) in water was prepared by dissolving some glycerol in 500 g of water. This solution has a boiling point of 100.42°C while pure water boils at 100°C. What mass of glycerol was dissolved to make the solution?
(Kb for water = 0.512 K kg mol-1)         (CBSE Delhi 2012, CBSE AI 2012)
Answer:
Elevation in boiling point
Tb = \(\frac{\mathrm{K}_{b} \times 1000 \times \mathrm{w}_{\mathrm{B}}}{\mathrm{w}_{\mathrm{A}} \times \mathrm{M}_{\mathrm{B}}}\)
ΔTb = 100.42 – 100 = 0.42°, wA = 500 g
wA = ?, Kb = 0.512 k Kg mol-1
MB = 3 × 12 + 8 × 1 + 3 × 16 = 92 g/mol
0.42 = \(\frac{0.512 \times 1000 \times w_{B}}{92 \times 500}\)
or wB = \(\frac{0.42 \times 500 \times 92}{0.512 \times 1000}\)
= 37.33 g
Mass of glycerol to be added = 37.33 g

Question 9.
A solution prepared by dissolving 1.25 g of oil of winter green (methyl salicylate) in 99.0 g of benzene has a boiling point of 80.31°C. Determine the molar mass of this compound. (B.P. of pure benzene = 80.10°C and Kb for benzene = 2.53 °C kg mol-1) (CBSE Delhi 2010)
Answer:
Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solution 2
kb = 2.53°C kg mol-1
wA = 99.0 g, wB = 1.25 g
MB = \(\frac{2.53 \times 1000 \times 1.25}{0.21 \times 99.0}\)
= 152.1 g mol-1

Question 10.
18 g of glucose, C6H12O6 (molar mass = 180 g mol-1), is dissolved in 1 kg of water in a sauce pan. At what temperature will this solution boil?
(Kb for water = 0.52 K kg mol-1, boiling point of pure water = 373.15 K). (CBSE Delhi 2013)
Answer:
ΔTb = \(\frac{\mathrm{K}_{b} \times 1000 \times \mathrm{w}_{\mathrm{B}}}{\mathrm{w}_{\mathrm{A}} \times \mathrm{M}_{\mathrm{B}}}\)
wB = 18 g, wA = 1000 g, MB = 180 g/mol,
Kb = 0.52 K kg mol-1
∴ ΔTb = \(\frac{0.52 \times 1000 \times 18}{1000 \times 180}\) = 0.052 K
Boiling point of solution
= 373.15 + 0.052 = 373.202 K.

Question 11.
A solution containing 15 g urea (molar mass = 60 g mol-1) per litre of solution in water has the same osmotic pressure (isotonic) as a solution of glucose (molar mass = 180 g mol-1) in water. Calculate the mass of glucose present in one litre of its solution. (CBSE Al 2014)
Answer:
For isotonic solutions,
π (urea) = π (glucose)
Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solution 3

Question 12.
A 1.00 molal solution of trichloroacetic acid (CCl3COOH) is heated to its boiling point. The solution has the boiling point of 100.18°C. Determine the van’t Hoff factor for trichloroacetic acid (Kb for water = 0.512 K kg mol-1). (CBSE Delhi 2012)
Answer:
Observed boiling point elevation,
ΔTb = 100.18 – 100.0 = 0.18°C
Molality of solution = 1.00 m
Calculated boiling point elevation,
ΔTb(calc.) = Kb × m
= 0.512 × 1 = 0.512
van’t Hoff factor,
Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solution 4

Question 13.
Blood cells are isotonic with 0.9% sodium chloride solution. What happens if we place blood cells in a solution containing
(i) 1.2% sodium chloride solution?
(ii) 0.4% sodium chloride solution? (CBSE AI 2016)
Answer:
(i) 1.2% sodium chloride solution is hypertonic with respect to 0.9% sodium chloride solution or blood cells. When blood cells are placed in this solution, water flows out of the cells and they shrink due to loss of water by osmosis.

(ii) 0.4% sodium chloride solution is hypotonic with respect to 0.9% sodium chloride solution or blood cells. When blood cells are placed in this solution, water flows into the cells and they swell.

Question 14.
1.00 g of non-electrolyte solute dissolved in 50 g of benzene lowered the freezing point of benzene by 0.40 K. Find the molar mass of the solute.
(Kf for benzene = 5.12 K kg mol-1). (CBSE AI 2013)
Answer:
Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solution 5

Question 15.
(a) Out of 0.1 molal aqueous solution of glucose and 0.1 molal aqueous solution of KCI, which one will have higher boiling point and why?
Answer:
(a) 0.1 m KCI solution will have higher boiling point. This is because KCl dissociates in water to give two ions (K+ and Cl) whereas glucose does not dissociate. Therefore, number of solute particles is greater in 0.1 m KCl as compared to 0.1 m glucose.

(b) Predict whether van’t Hoff factor
(i) is less than one or greater than one in the following:
(i) CH3COOH dissolved in water
(ii) CH3COOH dissolved in benzene (CBSE AI 2019)
Answer:
(i) i > 1 because CH3COOH dissociates in water.
(ii) i < 1 because CH3COOH associates in benzene.

Question 16.
Urea forms an ideal solution in water. Determine the vapour pressure of an aqueous solution containing 10% by mass of urea at 40°C. (Vapour pressure of water at 40°C = 55.3 mm of Hg) (CBSE AI 2006)
Answer:
wA = 90 g. wB = 10 g
Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solution 6
55.3 – pA = 1.84
∴ pA = 53.46 mm Hg

Question 17.
A solution of chloroform and acetone is an example of maximum boiling azeotrope. Why? (CBSE Sample Paper 2012)
Answer:
The solution of chloroform and acetone has lower vapour pressure than ideal solution because of stronger interactions between chloroform and acetone molecules. As a result, total vapour pressure becomes less than the corresponding ideal solution of same composition (i.e. negative deviations). Therefore, the boiling points of solutions are increased and form maximum boiling azeotropes.

Question 18.
A solution of glucose (C6H12O6) in water is labelled as 10% by weight. What would be the molality of the solution? (CBSEAI 2013)
Answer:
10% by weight means that 10 g of glucose is present in 100 g of solution.
Mass of solvent = 100 – 10 = 90 g 10
Moles of glucose = \(\frac{10}{180}\) = 0.0556 moles
Molality = \(\frac{0.0556}{90}\) × 1000
= 0.618 m.

Question 19.
What is meant by positive deviations from Raoult’s law? Give an example. What is the sign of Δmix H for positive deviation?
OR
Define azeotropes. What type of azeotrope is formed by positive deviation from Raoult’s law? Give an example. (Delhi 2015)
Answer:
When the observed vapour pressure of a liquid solution is higher than the value expected from Raoult’s law, it is called positive deviation from Raoult’s law.
Ptotal > P°A XA + P°B XB
for the two components A and B.
Example: Ethyl alcohol and cyclohexane
ΔHmix is positive.
OR
Liquid mixtures which boil at constant temperature and can distil unchanged in composition are called azeotropes.
The mixture which shows positive deviation from Raoult’s law forms minimum boiling azeotrope.
Example: A mixture of ethanol and water containing 95.4% ethanol forms minimum boiling azeotrope.

Question 20.
Write two differences between an ideal solution and a non-ideal solution. (CBSE Delhi 2019)
Answer:

Ideal solution Non-ideal solution
(i) Each component of solution obeys Raoult’s Law at all temperatures and concentrations. (i) Their components do not obey Raoult’s law.
(ii) There is no enthalpy change on mixing.
Δmixing H = 0
(ii) There is enthalpy change on mixing.
Δmixing H ≠ 0

Question 21.
Define an ideal solution and write one of its characteristics. (CBSE 2014)
Answer:
An ideal solution may be defined as the solution which obeys Raoult’s law exactly over the entire range of temperature and pressure. For ideal solution

  • Heat of mixing is zero
  • Volume change of mixing is zero.

Question 22.
State Henry’s law. What is the effect of temperature on the solubility of a gas in a liquid? (CBSE 2014)
Answer:
Henry’s law states that the mass of a gas dissolved per unit volume of the solvent at a constant temperature is directly proportional to the pressure of the gas in equilibrium with the solution.

The solubility of a gas decreases with increase in temperature. However, it may be noted that there are certain gases like hydrogen and inert gases whose solubility increases slightly with increase in temperature especially in non-aqueous solvents such as alcohols, acetone, etc.

Question 23.
State Raoult’s law for the solution containing volatile components. What is the similarity between Raoult’s law and Henry’s law? (CBSE 2014)
Answer:
Raoult’s law states that at a given temperature for a solution of volatile liquids, the partial vapour pressure of each component in solution is equal to the product of the vapour pressure of pure component and its mole fraction.
Similarity between Raoult’s law and Henry’s law

  • Both Raoult’s law and Henry’s law apply to volatile component in solution. .
  • Both laws state that the vapour pressure of one component is proportional to the mole fraction of that component.

Solutions Important Extra Questions Long Answer Type

Question 1.
Calculate the freezing point of a solution containing 0.5 g KCI (Molar mass = 74.5 g/ mol) dissolved in 100 g water, assuming KCI to be 92% ionised. Kf of water = 1.86 K kg / mol. (CBSE Sample Paper 2019)
Answer:
Let us consider one mole of KCI whose degree of dissociation is α. The dissociation of KCI can be represented as:
KCI → K+ + Cl
1 – α       α      α
Total number of moles after dissociation
= 1 – α + α + α
= 1 + α
Hence i = \(\frac{1+\alpha}{1}\)
If the solute dissolves in the solvent giving n ions, then here n = 2
i = 1 + (n -1) α
= 1 + (2 – 1) α = 1 + α
Now, ∆Tf = i Kfm
= (1 + 0.92) × 1.86 × \(\frac{0.5 \times 1000}{74.5 \times 100}\)
∆Tf = 0.24
∆Tf = T°f – T’f = 0 – 0.24
T’f = -0.24°C

Question 2.
State Henry’s law. Why do gases always tend to be less soluble in liquids as the temperature is raised?
OR
State Raoult’s taw for the solution containing volatile components. Write two differences between an ideal solution and a non-ideal solution. (CBSE Delhi 2015)
Answer:
Henry’s law states that the mass of a gas dissolved per unit volume of the solvent is directly proportional to the pressure of the gas in equilibrium with the solution.

If m is the mass of the gas dissolved in a unit volume of the solvent and p is the pressure of the gas in equilibrium with the solution, then
m ∝ p
or m = K.p
(where K is the proportionality constant) or “partial pressure of the gas in its vapour phase (p) is directly proportional to the mole fraction of the gas (x) in the solution”.
P = KH.X
The dissolution of a gas in a liquid is exothermic process. Therefore, in accordance with Le Chatelier’s principle, with increase in temperature, the equilibrium shifts in the backward direction. As a result, solubility decreases with increase in temperature.
OR
Raoult’s law states that for a solution of volatile liquids, the partial vapour pressure of each component in solution is equal to the product of the vapour pressure of the pure component and its mole fraction. For a binary solution of two components A and B,
PA = PA° × XA
PB = PB° × XB
Differences between ideal and non-ideal solutions

Ideal solution Non-ideal solution

Ideal solution Non-ideal solution
1. It obeys Raoult’s law over the entire range of concentration of solution. 1. It does not obey Raoult’s law.
2. Solute-solvent interactions are nearly same as in pure solvent. 2. Solute-solvent interactions are not same as solute-solute or solvent-solvent interactions.

Question 3.
Calculate the amount of KCI which must be added to 1 kg of water so that the freezing point is depressed by 2 K. (Kf for water = 1.86 K kg mol-1) (CBSE Delhi 2012)
Answer:
ΔTf = 2 K
KCl ⇌ K+ + Cl
i = 2
Kf = 1.86 K kg mol-1
wA = 1 kg = 1000 g
MB = (39 + 35.5) = 74.5 g
wB = ?
Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solution 7

Question 4.
What mass of NaCl must be dissolved in 65.0 g of water to lower the freezing point of water by 7.50°C? The freezing point depression constant (Kf) for water is 1.86°C/m. Assume van’t Hoff factor for NaCl is 1.87 (Molar mass of NaCI = 58.5 g mol-1). (CBSE 2011)
Answer:
Lowering in freezing point,
ΔTf = 7.50°C
Kf = 1.86 °C/m,
Mass of water, WA = 65.0 g
Molar mass of NaCl, MB = 58.5 g
Mass of NaCl, WB = ?
van’t Hoff factor, i = 1.87
Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solution 8

Question 5.
Determine the osmotic pressure of a solution prepared by dissolving 2.5 × 10-2 g of K2SO4 in 2 L of water at 25°C, assuming that it is completely dissociated. (CBSE Delhi 2013)
(R = 0.0821 L atm K-1 mol-1, Molar mass of K2SO4 = 174 g mol-1)
Answer:
Since K2SO4 dissociates completely,
K2SO4 → 2K+ + SO42-
One mole of K2SO4 will give 3 mole particles and therefore, the value of ‘i’ is 3.
Osmotic pressure, π = iCRT
= i\(\frac{\mathrm{W}_{\mathrm{B}}}{\mathrm{M}_{\mathrm{B}} \times \mathrm{V}}\)RT
WB = 2.5 × 10-2 g, V = 2.0 L, MB = 174 g/mol
R = 0.821 L atm mol-1 K-1
∴ π = \(\frac{3 \times 2.5 \times 10^{-2} \times 0.0821 \times 298}{174 \times 2.0}\)
= 5.27 × 10-3 atm

Question 6.
Calculate the mass of compound (molar mass = 256 g mol-1) to be dissolved in 75 g of benzene to lower its freezing point by 0.48 K (Kf = 5.12 K kg mol-1). (CBSE Delhi 2014)
Answer:
ΔTf = 0.48 K, Kf = 5.12 K kg mol-1
M = 256 g mol-1, wA = 75g, wB = ?
Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solution 9

Question 7.
3.9 g of benzoic acid dissolved in 49 g of benzene shows a depression in freezing point of 1.62 K. Calculate the van’t Hoff factor and predict the nature of solute (associated or dissociated).
(Given: Molar mass of benzoic acid = 122 g mol-1, Kf for benzene = 4.9 K kg mol-1) (CBSE Delhi 2015)
Answer:
ΔTf = i Kf × m
= \(\frac{i \times K_{f} \times W_{2} \times 1000}{M_{2} \times W_{1}}\)
W2 = 3.9 g, W1 = 49 g, ΔTf = 1.62 K,
M2 = 122 g mol-1
Kf = 4.9 K kg mol-1
1.62 = \(\frac{i \times 4.9 \times 3.9 \times 1000}{122 \times 49}\)
or i = \(\frac{1.62 \times 122 \times 49}{4.9 \times 3.9 \times 1000}\) = 0.506
Since i is less than 1, the solute is associated.

Question 8.
A solution of glucose (molar mass = 180 g mol-1) in water is labelled as 10% by mass. What would be the molality and molarity of the solution? (Density of solution = 1.2 g mL-1) (Delhi Al 2014)
Answer:
10% (by mass) solution of glucose means that 10 g of glucose is present in 100 g of solution or in 90 g of water.

(i) Calculation of molality
Mass of glucose = 10 g
Moles of glucose = \(\frac{10}{180}\) = 0.0556
(Molar mass of glucose = 180 g/mol)
Mass of water = 90 g
Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solution 10
= \(\frac{0.0556}{90}\) × 1000
= 0.618 m

(ii) Calculation of molarity
Moles of glucose = 0.0556 Mass
Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solution 11

Question 9.
A 4% solution (w/w) of sucrose (M = 342 g mol-1) in water has a freezing point of 271.15 K. Calculate the freezing point of 5% glucose (M = 180 g mol-1) in water. (Given: Freezing point of pure water = 273.15 K)
Answer:
For Sucrose solution,
WB = 4 g, WA = 100 – 4 = 96 g,
ΔTf = 273.15 – 271.5 = 2°C
Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solution 12
Freezing point of solution = 273.15 – 4.8
= 268.35 K

Question 10.
What would be the molar mass of a compound if 6.21 g of it dissolved in 24.0 g of chloroform form a solution that has a boiling point of 68.04°C. The boiling point of pure chloroform is 61.7°C and the boiling point elevation constant, Kb, for chloroform is 3.63 °C/m. (CBSE Delhi 2011)
Answer:
Elevation in boiling point,
ΔTb = 68.04 – 61.7 = 6.34 °C
Mass of substance,
wB = 6.21 g,
Mass of chloroform,
wA = 24.0g
Kb = 3.63 °C/m
Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solution 13

Question 11.
Two elements A and B form compounds having molecular formula AB2 and AB4. When dissolved in 20 g of benzene, 1 g of AB2 lowers the freezing point by 2.3 K, whereas 1.0 g of AB4 lowers it by 1.3 K. The molar depression constant for benzene is 5.1 K kg mol-1. Calculate the atomic mass of A and B. (Delhi Al 2004)
Answer:
Let us first calculate molar masses of AB2 and AB4.
For AB2 compound
MB = \(\frac{\mathrm{K}_{f} \times \mathrm{W}_{\mathrm{B}} \times 1000}{\mathrm{w}_{\mathrm{A}} \times \Delta \mathrm{T}_{f}}\)
ΔTf = 2.3 K, wB = 1.0 g,
wA = 20.0 g
Kf = 5.1 K kg mol-1
MAB2 = \(\frac{5.1 \times 1.0 \times 1000}{20.0 \times 2.3}\)
∴ MAB2 = 110.87
For AB4 compound
ΔTf= 1.3 K, wB = 1.0 g,
wA = 20.0 g
MAB4 = \(\frac{5.1 \times 1.0 \times 1000}{20.0 \times 1.3}\)
∴ MAB4 = 196.15
Let a be the atomic mass of A and b be the atomic mass of B, then
MAB2 = a + 2b = 110.87 …… (i)
MAB4 = a + 4b = 196.15 ……. (ii)
Subtracting eqn. (ii) from eqn. (i)
– 2b = – 85.28
∴ b = 42.64
Substituting the value of b in eqn (i)
a + 2 × 42.64 = 110.87
a = 110.87 – 85.28 = 25.59
Atomic mass of A = 25.59 g
Atomic mass of B = 42.64 g

Question 12.
A solution prepared by dissolving 8.95 mg of a gene fragment in 35.0 mL of water has an osmotic pressure of 0.335 torr at 25°C. Assuming the gene fragment is a non-electrolyte, determine its molar mass. (CBSE Delhi 2011, Delhi Al 2011)
Answer:
Mass of gene fragment = 8.95 mg
= 8.95 × 10-3 g
Volume of water = 35.0 mL
= 35.0 × 10-3 L
Osmotic pressure,
π = 0.335 torr
= 0.335/760 atm
Temperature = 25°C
= 273 + 25 = 298 K
Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solution 14
= 14193.3 g mol-1 or
1.42 × 1o4g mol-1.

Question 13.
Calculate the boiling point of solution when 2 g of Na2SO4 (M = 142 g mol-1) was dissolved in 50 g of water, assuming Na2SO4 undergoes complete ionization. (Kb for water = 0.52 K kg mol-1) [Delhi Al 2016)
Answer:
ΔTb = \(\frac{i \times K_{b} \times w_{B} \times 1000}{M_{B} \times w_{A}}\)
Weight of solute, wB = 2 g
Molar mass = 142 g mol-1
Weight of solvent = 50 g
Kb = 0.52 K kg mol-1
Na2SO4 undergoes complete ionisation as:
Na2SO4 ⇌ 2Na+ + SO42-
One mole of Na2SO4 gives 3 mole particles and therefore,
i = 3
∴ ΔTb = \(\frac{3 \times 0.52 \times 2 \times 1000}{142 \times 50}\) = 0.439
Boiling point of solution = 373 + 0.439
= 373.439 K

Question 14.
Calculate the amount of CaCl2 (molar mass = 111 g mol-1) which must be added to 500 g of water to lower its freezing point by 2 K, assuming CaCl2 is completely dissociated, (Kf for water = 1.86 K kg mol-1) (Delhi Al 2015)
Answer:
CaCl2 undergoes complete dissociation as:
CaCl2 → Ca2+ + 2Cl
One mole of CaCl2 will give 3 mole particles and therefore, the value of T will be equal to 3.
ΔTf = i Kf × m
= \(\frac{i \times K_{f} \times w_{B} \times 100}{M_{B} \times W_{A}}\)
Kf = 1.86 K kg mol-1, wA = 500 g, wB = ?, ΔTf = 2 K, i = 3, MB = 111 g mol-1
2 = \(\frac{3 \times 1.86 \times w_{B} \times 1000}{111 \times 500}\)
∴ WB = \(\frac{2 \times 111 \times 500}{3 \times 1.86 \times 1000}\) = 19.89 g

Question 15.
A solution 0.1 M of Na2SO4 is dissolved to the extent of 95%. What would be its osmotic pressure at 27°C? (R = 0.0821 L atm K-1 mol-1) (CBSE AI 2019)
Answer:
Na2SO4 ⇌ 2Na+ + SO42-
n = 3
If α is the degree of dissociation, then
α = \(\frac{i-1}{n-1}\)
0.95 = \(\frac{i-1}{3-1}\)
0.95 × 2 = i – 1 or i = 1.90 + 1 = 2.90
π = iCRT
= 2.90 × 0.1 × 0.0821 × 300
= 7.143 atm

Question 16.
(i) Out of 1 M glucose and 2 M glucose, which one has a higher boiling point and why?
(ii) What happens when the external pressure applied becomes more than the osmotic pressure of solution? (Delhi Al 2016)
Answer:
(i) The elevation in boiling point is a colligative property and depends upon the number of moles of solute added. Higher the concentration of solute added, higher will be the elevation in boiling point. Thus, 2M glucose solution has higher boiling point than 1 M glucose solution.

(ii) When the external pressure applied becomes more than the osmotic pressure of the solution, then the solvent molecules from the solution pass through the semipermeable membrane to the solvent side. This process is called reverse osmosis.

Question 17.
Which of the following solutions has higher freezing point?
0.05 M Al2(SO4)3, 0.1 M K3[Fe(CN)6] Justify. (CBSE Sample Paper 2017-18)
Answer:
0.05 M Al2(SO4)3 has higher freezing point.
ΔTf ∝ i × concentration
For 0.05 M Al2(SO4)3 i = 5
ΔTf ∝ 5 × 0.05 = 0.25 moles of ions
For 0.1 M K3[Fe(CN)6], i = 4
ΔTf ∝ 4 × 0.1 = 0.40 moles of ions
∴ Depression in freezing point for 0.05 M Al2(SO4)3 will be less and hence freezing point will be higher.

Question 18.
A 10% solution (by mass) of sucrose in water has freezing point of 269.15 K. Calculate the freezing point of 10% glucose in water, if freezing point of pure water is 273.15 K. Given: (Molar mass of sucrose = 342 g mol-1) (Molar mass of glucose = 180 g mol-1) (CBSE AI 2017, CBSE Delhi 2017)
Answer:
For sucrose solution,
Kf = \(\frac{\Delta T_{f} \times w_{A} \times M_{B}}{w_{B} \times 1000}\)
ΔTf = 273.15 – 269.15 = 4.0 k, wB = 10 g
WA = 100 – 10 = 90 g
kf = \(\frac{4.0 \times 90 \times 342}{10 \times 1000}\) = 12.31 km-1
For glucose solution,
wB = 10 g, wA = 100 – 10 = 90 g
MB = 180 g
ΔTf = \(\frac{12.31 \times 10 \times 1000}{90 \times 180}\) = 7.6 k
Freezing point of glucose solution
= 273.15 – 7.6
= 265.55 K

Question 19.
30 g of urea (M = 60 g mol-1) is dissolved in 846 g of water. Calculate the vapour pressure of water for this solution if vapour pressure of pure water at 298 K is 23.8 mm Hg. (CBSE Al 2017)
Answer:
Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solution 15

Question 20.
The vapour pressures of pure liquids A and B are 450 mm and 700 mm of Hg respectively at 350 K. Calculate the composition of liquid mixture if total vapour pressure is 600 mm of Hg. Also find the composition of the mixture in vapour phase.
(CBSE Sample Paper 2010)
Answer:
Let mole fraction of liquid A in solution = xA
Mole fraction of liquid B in solution, xB = 1 – xA
P = PA°XA + PB°XB or = PA°XA + PB°(1 – xA)
p = 600 mm Hg
600 = 450 xA + 700 (1 – xA)
Solving, XA = \(\frac{100}{250}\) = 0.4
Mole fraction of liquid A = 0.4
Mole fraction of liquid B = 1 – 0.4 = 0.6
Calculation of composition of vapour phase
pA = PA°XA = 450 mm × 0.4 = 180 mm
pB = PB°XB = 700 × 0.6 = 420 mm
Ptotal = pA + pB = 180 + 420 = 600 mm
Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solution 16

Question 21.
Calculate the boiling point of a solution prepared by adding 15.00 g of NaCl to
250.0 g of water. (Kb for water = 0.512 K kg mol-1, molar mass of NaCl = 58.44 g) (CBSE Delhi 2011)
Answer:
ΔTb = \(\frac{\mathrm{iK}_{\mathrm{b}} \times 1000 \times \mathrm{W}_{2}}{\mathrm{~W}_{1} \times \mathrm{M}_{2}}\)
NaCl dissociates as:
NaCl → Na+ + Cl
∴ i = 2
W2 = 15.0 g, W1 = 250.0 g, M2 = 58.44 g mol-1
∴ Kb = 0.512 K kg mol-1
∴ ΔTb = \(\frac{2 \times 0.512 \times 1000 \times 15.0}{250.0 \times 58.44}\)
∴ Boiling point of solution = 100 + 1.05
= 101.5°C

Question 22.
(i) Define the following terms:
(a) Mole fraction
(b) van’t Hoff factor
(ii) 100 mg of a protein is dissolved in enough water to make 10.0 mL of a solution. If this solution has an osmotic pressure of 13.3 mm Hg at 25°C, what is the molar mass of protein? (R = 0.0821 L atm. mol-1 K-1 and 760 mm Hg = 1 atm.) (CBSE Delhi 2010)
Answer:
(i) (a) Mole fraction is the ratio of number of moles of one component to the total number of motes In a mixture. For example, in a binary mixture containing n1 and n2 moles of two components, Mole fraction of one component,
x1 = \(\frac{n_{1}}{n_{1}+n_{2}}\)
Mote fraction of second component,
x2 = \(\frac{n_{2}}{n_{1}+n_{2}}\)
(b) van’t Hoff factor is the ratio of the normal molar mass to the observed or abnormal molar mass of a solute in a solution due to association or dissociation.
Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solution 17

(ii) Osmotic pressure,
Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solution 19

Question 23.
(i) Differentiate between molarity and molality of a solution. How does a change in temperature influence their values?
(ii) Calculate the freezing point of an aqueous solution contaning 10.50 g of MgBr2 in 200 g of water (Molar mass of MgBr2 = 184 g mol-1, = for water = 1.86 K kg mol-1). (CBSE Delhi 2011)
Answer:
(i) Molality is the number of moles of solute per 1000 g of solvent, whereas molarity is the number of moles of solute per 1000 ml of the solution. Molality is represented as m, whereas molarity is represented as M.

Molarity changes with change in temperature because of change in volume. On the other hand, there is no effect of temperature on the molality of the solution.

(if) Moles of MgBr2
= \(\frac{10.50}{184}\)
= 0.0571 mol
Mass of water = 200 g
Molality = \(\frac{0.0571}{200}\) × 1000
= 0.2855 m
MgBr2 ionises as:
MgBr2 → Mg2+ + 2Br
Assuming complete dissociation of MgBr2,
i = 3
Freezing point depression
ΔTf = i × Kf × m
= 3 × 1.86 × 0.2855
= 1.59
Freezing point = 0 – 1.59°C
= – 1.59°C

Question 24.
(i) Define the terms osmosis and osmotic pressure. Is the osmotic pressure of a solution a colligative property? Explain.
(ii) Calculate the boiling point of a solution prepared by adding 15.00 g of NaCl to 250.0 g of water. (Kb for water = 0.512 K kg mol-1, molar mass of NaCl = 58.44 g mol-1) (CBSE Delhi 2011)
Answer:
(i) Osmosis is the flow of solvent from solution of lower concentration to higher concentration through a semi- permeable membrane.

Osmotic pressure is the excess pressure which must be applied to a solution to prevent the passage of solvent through a semipermeable memberane.

It has been found experimentally that for n moles of the solute dissolved in V litres of the solution, the osmotic pressure (π) at temperature T is
πV = nRT
where R is a gas constant.
or π = \(\frac{n}{V}\) RT
= C RT
where C is the molar concentration of the solution.
For a solution at given tempeature, both R and T are constant so that
π ∝ C
Thus, osmotic pressure depends upon the molar concentration of solution and therefore, is a colligative property.

(ii) ΔTb = \(\frac{i \mathrm{~K}_{b} \times 1000 \times \mathrm{W}_{2}}{\mathrm{~W}_{1} \times \mathrm{M}_{2}}\)
NaCl dissociates as:
NaCl → Na+ + Cl
∴ i = 2
W2 = 15.0 g, W1 = 250.0 g,
M2 = 58.44 g mol-1
Kb = 0.512 K kg mol-1 .
∴ ΔTb = \(\frac{2 \times 0.512 \times 1000 \times 15.0}{250.0 \times 58.44}\)
= 1.05°C
∴ Boiling point of solution = 100 + 1.05
= 101.5°C

Question 25.
(a) A 5% solution (by mass) of cane sugar in water has a freezing point of 271 K. Calculate the freezing point of 5% solution (by mass) of glucose in water. The freezing point of pure water is 273.15 K.
(b) Why is osmotic pressure of 1 M KCl higher than 1 M urea solution?
(c) What type of liquids form ideal solutions?
OR
(a) 1.0 g of a non-electrolyte solute dissolved in 50 g of benzene lowered the freezing point of benzene by 0.40 K. The freezing point depression constant of benzene is 5.12 K kg mol-1. Find the molar mass of the solute.
(b) What is the significance of Henry’s law constant, KH?
(c) What leads to anoxia? (CBSE 2019C)
Answer:
(a)
Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solution 19
(b) On dissolving in water KCl dissociates into K+ and Cl ions but urea does not dissociate into ions.

(c) Ideal solutions: An ideal solution may be defined as the solution which obeys Raoult’s law exactly over the entire range of concentration.
Such solutions are formed by mixing the two components which are identical in molecular size, in structure and have almost identical intermolecular forces. In these solutions, the intermolecular interactions between the components (A – B attractions) are of same magnitude as the intermolecular interactions in pure components (A – A and B – B attractions).

The ideal solutions have also the following characteristics:
1. Heat change on mixing is zero. Since there is no change in magnitude of the attractive forces in the two components present, the heat change on mixing, i.e. ΔmixingH in such solutions must be zero.

(ii) Volume change on mixing is zero. In ideal solutions, the volume of the solution is the sum of the volumes of the components before mixing, i.e. there is no change in volume on mixing or ΔmixingV is zero.

For example, when we mix 100 cm3 of benzene with 100 cm3 of toluene, the volume of the solution is found to be exactly 200 cm3. Therefore, there is no change in volume on mixing, i.e. ΔmixingV = 0. It has been noticed that the solutions generally tend to become ideal when they are dilute.

Examples of ideal solutions: In fact, ideal solutions are quite rare but some solutions are nearly ideal in behaviour at least when they are very dilute. A few examples of ideal solutions are:

  • Benzene and toluene
  • n-hexane and n-heptane
  • Bromoethane and iodoethane
  • Chlorobenzene and bromobenzene.

OR

(a)
Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solution 20

(b) (i) Henry’s law constant, KH depends upon the nature of the gas.
(ii) Higher the value of KH at a particular pressure, the lower is the solubility of the gas in the liquid. (∵ x = \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{~K}_{\mathrm{H}}}\) . p)

(iii) The value of KH increases with increase in temperature indicating that the solubility of gases decreases with increase of temperature. This is the reason that aquatic species are more comfortable in cold water rather than warm water.

(c) At high altitudes, the partial pressure of oxygen is less than that at the ground level. This leads to low concentration of oxygen in the blood and the tissues of the people living at high altitudes. As a result of low oxygen in the blood, the people become weak and unable to think clearly. These are the symptoms of a condition known as anoxia.

Question 26.
(i) State Raoutt’s law for a solution containing volatile components. How does Raoult’s law become a special case of Henry’s law?
(ii) 1.00 g of non-electrolyte solute dissolved in 50 g of benzene lowered the freezing point of benzene by 0.40 K. Find the molar mass of the solute. (Kf for benzene = 512 K kg mol-1)
OR
(i) Define the following terms:
(a) Ideal solution
(b) Azeotrope
(c) Osmotic pressure
(ii) A solution of glucose (C6H12O6) in
water is labelled as 10% by weight. What would be the molality of the solution? (CBSE 2013)
(Molar mass of glucose = 180 g mol-1)
Answer:
(i) Raoult’s law states that at a given temperature, for a solution of volatile liquids, the partial pressure of each component in solution is equal to the product of the vapour pressure of the pure component and its mole fraction. For example, for a binary solution of two volatile liquids A and B having mole fractions xA and xB,
PA = P°A XA and PB = P°B XB
where pA and pB are the vapour pressures of the components in solutions and P°A and P°B are vapour pressure of pure components.
According to Henry’s law for a gas dissolved in a liquid, the pressure of the gas is directly proportional to mole fraction, i.e.
p = KHx
where KH is a proportionality constant known as Henry’s constant.
But Raoult’s law states that
p = p°x
∴ KH = p°
This means that Raoult’s law is a special case of Henry’s law.

(ii) Molar mass of solute,
MB = \(\frac{K_{f} \times W_{B} \times 1000}{W_{A} \times \Delta T_{f}}\)
WB = 1.0g
WA = 50.0 g,
ΔTf = 0.40 K
Kf = 5.12 K kg mol-1
MB = \(\frac{5.12 \times 1.0 \times 1000}{50 \times 0.40}\)
= 256 g/mol

OR

(i) (a) Ideal solution. A solution which obeys Raoult’s law exactly over the entire range of concentration is called ideal solution.

(b) Azeotrope. The solutions or liquid mixtures which boil at constant temperature and can distil unchanged in composition are called azeotropes.

(c) Osmotic pressure. The excess pressure which must be applied to a solution to prevent the passage of solvent into it through a semipermeable membrane is called osmotic pressure.

(ii) 10% by weight means that 10 g of glucose is present in 100 g of solution.
Mass of solvent = 100 – 10 = 90 g
Moles of glucose = \(\frac{10}{180}\) = 0.0556
Molality = \(\frac{0.0556}{90}\) × 1000
= 0.618 m

Question 27.
(i) Define the following terms:
(a) Molarity
(b) Molal elevation constant (Kb)
(ii) A solution containing 15 g urea
(molar mass = 60 g mol-1) per litre of solution in water has the same osmotic pressure (isotonic) as a solution of glucose (molar mass = 180 g mol-1) in water. Calculate the mass of glucose present in one litre of its solution. (CBSE 2014)
OR
(i) What type of deviation is shown by a mixture of ethanol and acetone? Give reason.
(ii) A solution of glucose (molar mass = 180 g mol-1) in water is labelled as 10% (by mass). What would be the molality and molarity of the solution?
(Density of solution = 1.2 g mL-1)
Answer:
(i) (a) Molarity is defined as number of moles of solute dissolved per litre of solution.
Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solution 21
Its unit is mol L-1 or M.

(b) Molal elevation constant Kb is the elevation in boiling point for 1 molal solution.
(ii) For isotonic solutions,
π (urea) = π (glucose)
Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solution 22

OR

(i) Mixture of ethanol and acetone shows positive deviations from Raoult’s law. This is because in ethanol, the molecules are held together due to hydrogen bonding as:
Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solution 23
When acetone is added to ethanol, there are weaker interactions between acetone and ethanol than ethanol-ethanol interactions. Some molecules of acetone occupy spaces between ethanol molecules and consequently, some hydrogen bonds in alcohol molecules break and attractive forces between ethanol molecules are weakened.

Therefore, the escaping tendency of ethanol and acetone molecules from solution increases. Thus, the vapour pressure of the solution is greater than the vapour pressure as expected according to Raoult’s law.

(ii) WB = 10 g, wt. of solvent = 90 g
MB = 180 g mol-1
Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solution 24
Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solution 25

Question 28.
(i) Calculate the freezing point of solution when 1.9 g of MgCl2 (M = 95 g mol-1) was dissolved in 50 g of water, assuming MgCl2 undergoes complete ionisation.
(Kf for water = 1.86 K kg mol-1)
(ii) (a) Out of 1 M glucose and 2 M glucose, which one has a higher boiling point and why?
(b) What happens when the external pressure applied becomes more than the osmotic pressure of solution? (CBSE Delhi 2016)
OR
(i) When 2.56 g of sulphur was dissolved in 100 g of CS2, the freezing point lowered by 0.383 K. Calculate the formula of sulphur (Sx).
(Kf for CS2 = 3.83 K kg mol-1, Atomic mass of sulphur = 32 g mol-1)
(ii) Blood cells are isotonic with 0.9% sodium chloride solution. What happens if we place blood cells in a solution containing
(a) 1.2% sodium chloride solution?
(b) 0.4% sodium chloride solution?
Answer:
(i) ΔTf = \(\frac{i \mathrm{~K}_{f} \times \mathrm{w}_{\mathrm{B}} \times 1000}{M_{\mathrm{B}} \times \mathrm{w}_{\mathrm{A}}}\)
wB = 1.9 g, wA = 50 g, MB = 95 g mol-1
Kf = 1.86 K kg mol-1
MgCl2 ⇌ Mg2+ + 2Cl
i = 3
ΔTf = \(\frac{3 \times 1.86 \times 1.9 \times 1000}{95 \times 50}\)
= 2.232 K
Freezing point of solution
= 273 – 2.232 = 270.768 K

(ii) (a) The elevation in boiling point is a colligative property and depends upon the number of moles of solute added. Higher the concentration of solute added, higher will be the elevation in boiling point. Thus, 2 M glucose solution has higher boiling point than 1 M glucose solution.

(b) When the external pressure applied becomes more than the osmotic pressure of the solution, then the solvent molecules from the solution pass through the semipermeable membrane to the solvent side. This process is called reverse osmosis.
OR
(i) MB = \(\frac{\mathrm{K}_{f} \times 1000 \times \mathrm{W}_{\mathrm{B}}}{\mathrm{W}_{\mathrm{A}} \times \Delta \mathrm{T}_{f}}\)
WB = 2.56 g, WA = 100 g, ΔTf = 0.383 Kf = 3.83 K kg mol-1
Let the molecular formula of sulphur
= Sx
32 × x = 256
x = \(\frac{256}{32}\) = 8
∴ Molecular formula = S8

(ii) (a) 1.2% sodium chloride solution is hypertonic with respect to 0.9% sodium chloride solution or blood cells. When red blood cells are placed in this solution, water flows out of the cell and they shrink due to loss of water by osmosis.

(b) 0.4% sodium chloride solution is hypertonic with respect to 0.9% sodium chloride solution or blood cells. When red blood cells are placed in this solution, water flows into the cells and they swell.

Question 29.
A 4% solutioin (w/w) of sucrose (M = 342 g mol-1) in water has a freezing point of 271.15 K. Calculate the freezing point of 5% glucose (M = 180 g mol-1) in water.
(Given: Freezing point of pure water = 273.15 K)
Answer:
In case of sucrose:
ΔTf = (273.15 – 271.15) K = 2.00 K
Molar mass of sucrose (C12H22O11)
= (12 × 12) + (22 × 1) + (11 × 16) = 342 g mol-1
4% solution (w/w) of sucrose in water means 4 g of cane sugar in (100 – 4) g = 96 g of water.
Number of moles in 4 g sucrose in water
= 4/342 mol or 0.01169 mol
Therefore, molality of the solution,
m = 0.011696 mol / 0.096 kg
Or
m = 0.1217 mol kg-1
Now applying the relation,
ΔTf = Kf × m
⇒ Kf = ΔTf / m
⇒ 2.00 K/0.1217 mol kg-1
= 16.4338 K kg mol-1
Molar mass of glucose (C6H12O6) = (6 × 12) + (12 × 1) + (6 × 16) = 180 g mol-1
5% glucose in water means 5 g of glucose is present in (100 – 5) g = 95 g of water.
∴ Number of moles of glucose = 5/180 mol
= 0.0278 mol
Therefore, molality of the solution, m = 0.0278 mol / 0.095 kg
= 0.2926 mol kg-1
Applying the relation, ΔTf = Kf × m
ΔTf = (16.4338 K kg mol-1) × (0.2926 mol kg-1 )
= 4.81 K (approx.)
Hence, the freezing point of 5% glucose solution is (273.15 – 4.81) K = 268.34 K.

Thermodynamics Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry Chapter 6

Here we are providing Class 11 chemistry Important Extra Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Thermodynamics. Chemistry Class 11 Important Questions are the best resource for students which helps in Class 11 board exams.

Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 6 Important Extra Questions Thermodynamics

Thermodynamics Important Extra Questions Very Short Answer Type

Question 1.
Under what conditions the heat evolved or absorbed is equal to the internal energy change?
Answer:
At constant volume.

Question 2.
What is the sign of AH for endothermic reactions and why?
Answer:
AH is positive as ΔH = Hp – Hr and Hr < Hp.

Question 3.
What is the relationship between the standard enthalpy of formation and the enthalpy of a compound?
Answer:
They are equal.

Question 4.
Why enthalpy of neutralization of HF is greater than 57.1 kJ mol-1?
Answer:
This is due to the high hydration energy of fluoride ions.

Question 5.
What are the specific heat capacity and molar heat capacity for water?
Answer:
Specific heat capacity for H2O = 4.18 JK-1 g-1
Molar heat capacity for H2O = 4.18 × 18 = 75.24 JK-1 mol-1.

Question 6.
Why enthalpy of neutralization is less if either the acid or the base or both are weak?
Answer:
A part of the heat is used up for dissociation of the weak acid or weak base or both.

Question 7.
What do you mean by a system?
Answer:
A specified part of the universe that is under thermodynamic observation is called a system.

Question 8.
Define a cyclic process.
Answer:
A process in which a system undergoes a series of changes and ultimately returns to the original state is called a cyclic process. For a cyclic process; ΔU = 0.

Question 9.
Why the entropy of a diamond is less than that of graphite?
Answer:
Diamond is more compact than graphite.

Question 10.
Under what conditions, ΔH of a process is equal to ΔU?
Answer:
At constant temperature and constant volume.

Question 11.
Is the enthalpy of neutralization of HCl is same as that of H2S04? If so, why?
Answer:
Yes. Because both are strong acids and ionized almost completely in aqueous solutions.

Question 12.
Which is a better fuel for the animal body: proteins or carbohydrates?
Answer:
Carbohydrates. They have high calorific value.

Question 13.
Is the experimental determination of enthalpy of formation of CH4 possible?
Answer:
No.

An online enthalpy calculator is specially designed to calculate exact amount of enthalpy generated in a thermodynamic system.

Question 14.
Can we calculate ΔH of every process from the bond energy data of reactants and products?
Answer:
No.

Question 15.
Define enthalpy of fusion.
Answer:
It is defined as the heat change when one mole of solid changes to its liquid form at its melting point. ‘

Question 16.
For the reaction NaCl (aq) + AgNO3 (aq) → AgCl(s) + NaNO3(aq), will ΔH be greater than, equal to or less than ΔE?
Answer:
ΔH will be ΔE.

Question 17.
Write the mathematical relationship between heat, internal energy, and work done on the system.
Answer:
ΔE = q + w.

Question 18.
What is the limitation of the I law of thermodynamics?
Answer:
It cannot tell us about the direction of the process

Question 19.
What is the relationship between ΔH and ΔE?
Answer:
ΔH = ΔE + PΔV = ΔE + ΔngRT.

Question 20.
State the I law of thermodynamics.
OR
State the Law of conservation of energy.
Answer:
The energy of an isolated system remains conserved.
OR
The energy can neither be created nor destroyed, though it can be converted from one form into another.

Question 21.
Which of the following is a state function?
(i) height of a hill
(ii) distance traveled in climbing the hill
(iii) energy consumed in climbing the hill.
Answer:
Energy consumed in climbing the hill.

Question 22.
What is the internal energy of one mole of a noble gas?
Answer:
U = \(\frac{3}{2}\)RT.

Question 23.
Which of the following are state functions?
(i) q
(ii) heat capacity
(iii) specific heat capacity
(iv) ΔH and ΔU.
Answer:
(iii) specific heat capacity and
(iv) ΔH and ΔU

Question 24.
Name the two most common modes by which a system and surroundings exchange their energy?
Answer:
Heat and work.

Question 25.
What will happen to internal energy if work is done by the system?
Answer:
The internal energy of the system will decrease.

Question 26.
How many times is the molar heat capacity greater than the specific heat capacity of water?
Answer:
18 times.

Question 27.
Neither q nor w is a state function but q + w is a state function. Why?
Answer:
q + w is equal to ΔU, which is a state function.

Question 28.
Name the state function Which remains constant during an isothermal change.
Answer:
Temperature.

Question 29.
What is the value of enthalpy of neutralization of a strong acid and a strong base?
Answer:
– 57.1 kJ/gm equivalent.

Question 30.
Out of 1 mole of H2O(g) and 1 mole of H2O(l) which one will have greater entropy?
Answer:
H2O(g) will have greater entropy.

Question 31.
When a substance is said to be in its standard state?
Answer:
When it is present at 298 K and under one atmospheric pressure.

Question 32.
What is the entropy of the formation of an element in its standard state?
Answer:
By convention, the enthalpies (heats) of the formation of all elements in their most stable form (standard state) is taken as zero.

Question 33.
What is the physical significance of free energy change of a system?
Answer:
The decrease in free energy (- ΔG) is a measure of useful work or network obtainable during the process at constant temp and pressure.

Question 34.
Why is it essential to mention the physical state of reactants and products in thermochemical reactions?
Answer:
It is because the physical state of reactants and products also contributes significantly to the value ΔU or ΔH.

Question 35.
Name two intensive and extensive properties of a system.
Answer:

  • Intensive properties: Viscosity, refractive index.
  • Extensive properties: Mass, volume, heat capacity, etc.

Question 36.
What is fuel value or calorific value?
Answer:
It is defined as the amount of heat released when 1 gm of fuel or food is burnt completely in air or oxygen.

Question 37.
Is the process of diffusion of gases enthalpy driven or entropy-driven?
Answer:
It is an entropy-driven process.

Question 38.
The value of ΔHsol of NaNO3 is positive, yet the dissolution is spontaneous, why?
Answer:
There is a large increase in entropy i.e., it is an entropy-driven process.

Question 39.
Write a thermochemical equation of enthalpy of combustion of methanol.
Answer:
2CH3OH(l) + 3O2(g) → 2CO2(g) + 4H2O(1); ΔH = – Q kJ
where Q kJ mol-1 is the enthalpy of combustion.

Question 40.
What is the enthalpy of the formation of Cl2?
Answer:
Enthalpy of formation of a homonuclear molecule like Cl2 is zero.

Question 41.
For a reaction also ΔH and ΔS are positive. What is the condition that this reaction occurs spontaneously?
Answer:
To make ΔG negative TΔS > ΔH.

Question 42.
Arrange the following fuels in order of increasing fuel efficiency; kerosene, diesel oil, wax, natural gas.
Answer:
Lower hydrocarbons have higher calorific value and thus are more efficient.
wax < diesel oil < kerosene < natural gas.

Question 43.
What is the sign of ΔS when N2 and H2 combine to form NH3?
Answer:
ΔS is negative as the number of molecules decreases.

Question 44.
How will compare the efficiency of the three given fuels?
Answer:
By comparing their calorific values. Larger the calorific value, the greater the fuel efficiency.

Question 45.
How is a non-spontaneous process made spontaneous?
Answer:
By continuously supplying energy to it from outside.

Question 46.
What is the expression for entropy change for a phase transition? ‘
Answer:
ΔS = \(\frac{q_{\mathrm{rev}}}{\mathrm{T}}\)

Question 47.
Give an example of an isolated system.
Answer:
Thermos.

Question 48.
Is the enthalpy of formation of SnCl2(s) the same as that of ZnCl2(s)?
Answer:
No. They are different.

Question 49.
Why we usually study enthalpy change and not internal energy change?
Answer:
Most of the processes including reactions are carried out in open vessels at constant pressure.

Question 50.
What is the enthalpy of one mole of a noble gas?
Answer:
H = U + PV = \(\frac{3}{2}\) RT + RT = \(\frac{5}{2}\) RT.

Question 51.
Which of the thermodynamic properties out of U, S, T, P, V, H, and G are intensive properties and why?
Answer:
T and P, because they depend only upon the nature of the substance.

Question 52.
What is the relationship between qp and qv?
Answer:
qp = qv + Δng RT, where Δn = np– nr (gaseous).

Question 53.
What is the Gibb’s Helmholtz equation?
Answer:
ΔG = ΔH – TΔS, where ΔG, ΔH, and ΔS are free energy change, enthalpy change, and entropy change respectively.

Question 54.
Comment on the bond energies of four C-H bonds present in CH4?
Answer:
The bond energies of 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th C-H bonds are not equal and so average values are taken.

Question 55.
What is the main limitation of the first law of thermodynamics?
Answer:
It cannot predict the spontaneity of a process.

Question 56.
What is entropy?
Answer:
Entropy is a measure of the randomness/disorder of a system.

Question 57.
A reversible reaction has ΔG° negative for forwarding reaction. What will be the sign of ΔG° for the backward reaction?
Answer:
Negative.

Question 58.
What is the effect of increasing temperature on the entropy of a substance?
Answer:
It increases.

Question 59.
When is the entropy of a perfectly crystalline solid zero?
Answer:
At absolute zero (O.K).

Question 60.
What is an adiabatic process?
Answer:
In which no eat flow between the system and surroundings.

Thermodynamics Important Extra Questions Short Answer Type

Question 1.
Ice is lighter than water, but the entropy of ice is less than that of water. Explain.
Answer:
Water is the liquid form while ice is its solid form. Molecular motion in ice is restricted than in water, i.e., a disorder in ice is restricted than water, i.e., a disorder in ice is less than in water.

Question 2.
Define spontaneity or-feasibility of a process.
Answer:
Spontaneity or feasibility of a process means its inherent tendency to occur on its own in a particular direction under a given set of conditions.

Question 3.
Enthalpy of neutralization of CH3COOH and NaOH is 55.9 kJ. What is the value of ΔH for ionization of CH3COOH?
Answer:
The heat of neutralization of strong acid and strong base + ΔH of ionization of CH3COOH = Enthalpy of neutralization of CH3COOH and NaOH
∴ – 57.1 kJ + ΔH of ionisation of CH3COOH = – 55.9 kJ
∴ ΔH of ionisation of CH3COOH = (- 55.9 + 57.1) kJ
= 1.2 kJ.

Question 4.
When 1 gm of liquid naphthalene (C10H8) solidifies, 150 J of heat is evolved. What is the enthalpy of fusion of C10H8?
Answer:
ΔHsolidifcation = – 150 × 128 = – 19200 J = – 19.2 kJ
[∵ M.wt.of C10H8 = 128]

Question 5.
Why most of the exothermic processes (reactions) are spontaneous?
Answer:
ΔG = ΔH – TΔS; For exothermic reactions,
ΔH is -ve For a spontaneous process ΔG is to be -ve.

Thus decrease in enthalpy (- AH) contributes significantly to the driving force (To make ΔG negative).

Question 6.
What is meant by the term state function? Give examples.
Answer:
A state function is a thermodynamic property that depends upon the state of the system and is independent of the path followed to bring about the change. Internal energy change (ΔU), enthalpy change (ΔH) entropy change (ΔS), and free energy change (ΔG) are examples.

Question 7.
The enthalpy of combustion of sulfur is 297 kJ.
Write the thermochemical equation for the combustion of sulfur. What is the value of ΔfH of SO2?
Answer:
S(s) + O2(g) → SO2(g); ΔfH = – 297 kJ
∴ ΔH of SO2 = – 297 kJ mol-1

Question 8.
What would be the heat released when 0.35 mol of HC1 in solution is neutralized by 0.25 mol of NaOH solution?
Answer:
HCl and NaOH being strong acid and strong- base is completely ionization in dilute aqueous solutions. The net reaction is H + (0.25 mol) + OH (0.25. mol) → H2O (0.25 mol)

Now the heat of neutralization of 1 mole of a strong acid is – 57.1 kJ
∴ The heat released will be 57.1 × 0.25 kJ = 14.27 kJ.

Question 9.
Predict which of the following entropy increases/ decreases?
(i) A liquid crystallizes into a solid.
Answer:
After crystallization molecules attain an ordered state and therefore entropy decreases.

(ii) Temperature bf a crystalline solid is raised from 0 K to 115 K.
Answer:
When the temperature is raised, a disorder in molecules increases, and therefore entropy increases.

(iii) 2NaHCO3(s) → Na2CO3(s) + CO2(g) + H2O(g)
Answer:
The reactant is solid and hence has low entropy. Among the products there are two gases and be solid, therefore products represent a condition of higher entropy.

(iv) H2(g) → 2H(g).
Answer:
Here 2 moles of H atoms have higher entropy than one mole of the hydrogen molecule.

Question 10.
Discuss the effect of temperature on the spontaneity of reactions.
Answer:
Effect of temperature on the spontaneity of reactions:
Thermodynamics Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 1
The terms low temperature and high temperature are relative. For a particular reaction, the high temperature could even mean room temperature.

Question 11.
What is the most important condition for a process to be reversible in thermodynamics?
Answer:
The process should be carried out infinitesimally slowly or the driving force should be infinitesimally greater than the opposing force.

Question 12.
Why heat is not a state function?
Answer:
According to first law of Thermodynamics; ΔU = q + w or q – = ΔU – w. As ΔU is a state function, but w is not a state function, therefore q is also not a state function.

Question 13.
Why the absolute value of enthalpy cannot be determined?
Answer:
As H = U + PV
The absolute value of U – the internal energy cannot be determined as it depends upon various factors whose value, cannot be determined.
∴ The absolute value of H cannot be determined.

Question 14.
Which of the following is/are exothermic and which are endothermic?
(i) Ca(g) → Ca2+(g) + 2e
Answer:
Endothermic (Ionisation enthalpy is required)

(ii) O(g) + e → O(g) .
Answer:
Exothermic (first electron affinity-energy is released)

(iii) N2-(g) + e- → N3-(g).
Answer:
Endothermic (higher electron affinities are required).

Question 15.
Calculate Δr Gθ for the conversion of oxygen to ozone, \(\frac{3}{2}\)O2(g) → O3(g) at 298 K, if Kp for this conversion is 2.47 × 10-29
Answer:
Δr Gθ = – 2.303RT log Kp
and R = 8.314 JK-1 mol-1
∴ Δr Gθ = – 2.303 × 8.314 × 298 log 2.47 × 10-29
= 163000 j mol-1 = 163 kJ mol-1.

Question 16.
Find the value of the equilibrium constant for the following conversion reaction at 298 K.
Thermodynamics Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 2
Δr Gθ = – 13.6 kJ mol-1.
Answer:
r Gθ = 2.303 RT log K
Thermodynamics Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 3

Question 17.
At 60°C, N2O4 is 50% dissociated. Calculate Δr Gθ this temperature and at one atmospheric pressure.
Answer:
N2O4(g) ⇌ 2NO2(g)
If N2O4 is 50% dissociated, the mole fraction of both the substances are given by
Thermodynamics Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 4

Question 18.
Calculate the heat released when 0.5 moles of the nitric acid solution is mixed with 0.2 moles of potassium hydroxide solution.
Answer:
HNO3 is a strong acid and KOH is a strong base. Therefore, both are completely ionized in water. The net reaction is
Thermodynamics Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 5
∴ Heat evolved = – 57.1 × 0.2 = – 11.42 kJ.

Question 19.
Define Hess’s Law of Constant Heat Summation.
Answer:
The enthalpy change for a reaction remains the same whether it proceeds in one step or in series of steps all’ measurements being done under similar conditions of temperature.

This law is a corollary from I Law of Thermodynamics.

Question 20.
What are the applications of Hess’s Law of constant heat summation?
Answer:

  1. It helps to calculate the enthalpies of formation of those compounds which Cannot be determined experimentally.
  2. It helps to determine the enthalpy of allotropic transformations like C(graphite) → C (diamond).
  3. It helps to calculate the enthalpy of hydration.

Question 21.
Calculate the maximum work obtained when 0.75 mol of an ideal gas expands isothermally and reversible at 27°C from a volume of 15 L to 25 L.
Answer:
For an isothermal reversible expansion of an ideal gas
w = – nRT log \(\frac{\mathrm{V}_{2}}{\mathrm{~V}_{1}}\) = – 2.303 nRT log \(\frac{\mathrm{V}_{2}}{\mathrm{~V}_{1}}\)

Putting n = 0.75 mol; V1 = 15 L; V2 = 25 L, T = 27 + 273 = 300 K R = 8.314 JK-1 mol-1.
w = – 2.303 × 0.75 × 8.314 × 300 log \(\frac{25}{15}\)
= – 955.5 J.

Question 22.
What are heat capacities at constant volume and constant pressure? What is the relationship between them?
Answer:
Heat capacity at constant volume (Cv): Heat supplied to a system to raise its temperature through 1°C keeping the volume of the system constant is called its heat capacity at constant volume (Cv).

Heat capacity at constant pressure (Cp): Heat supplied to a system to raise its temperature through 1°C keeping the external pressure constant is called its heat capacity at constant pressure (Cp).

Relationship between Cp and Cv: Cp – Cv = R.

Question 23.
Explain what do you mean by a reversible process.
Answer:
A process or a change is said to be reversible if it can be reversed at any moment by an infinitesimal change. It proceeds infinitesimally slowly by a series of equilibrium states such that the system and surroundings are always in near equilibrium with each other.

Question 24.
Two liters of an ideal gas at a pressure of 10 atm expands isothermally into a vacuum until its. total volume is 10 liters. How much heat is absorbed and how much work is done in the expansion?
Answer:
We have q = – w: pext(10 – 2) = 0 × 8 = 0
No. work is done; No heat is absorbed.

Question 25.
Define (i) Molar enthalpy of fusion
Answer:
The enthalpy change that accompanies the melting of one mole of a solid substance at its melting point is called the articular enthalpy of fusion.

(ii) Molar enthalpy of vaporisation.
Answer:
The amount of heat required to vaporize one mole of a liquid at constant temperature and under standard pressure (1 bar) is called molar enthalpy of vaporization.

Question 26.
How will you arrive at the relationship qp = qv + ΔngRT?
Answer:
Enthalpy change ΔH = qp; where qp = heat change at constant pressure,
Internal energy change ΔU = qv; where qv = heat change at. constant volume.

Now ΔH = ΔU + PΔV
For ideal gases PV = nRT
∴ ΔH = ΔU + (PV2 – PV1)
= ΔU + P(V2 – V1) = ΔU + (n2RT – n1RT)
= ΔU + RT(n2 – n1) = ΔU + ΔngRT
or
qp = qv + ΔngRT

Question 27.
Define
(i) Specific heat capacity
Answer:
Specific heat capacity: It is the amount of heat required to raise the temperature of 1 gram of the substance through 1°C.

(ii) molar heat capacity.
Answer:
Molar heat capacity: It is the amount of heat required to raise the temperature of one mole of the substance through 1 °C.

Question 28.
Derive the relationship Cp – Cv = R.
Answer:
Thermodynamics Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 6

Question 28.
Derive the expression -ΔG = w non-expansion
Answer:
From I law of thermodynamics
Thermodynamics Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 7

Question 29.
How does the sign of G help in predicting the spontaneity/non-spontaneity of a process?
Answer:

  1. IF ΔG is negative, the process is spontaneous.
  2. If ΔG = O, the process does not occur and the system is in equilibrium.
  3. If ΔG is positive, the process does not proceed in the forward direction.

Question 30.
An exothermic reaction A B is spontaneous in the backward direction. What will be the sign of ΔS for the forward direction?
Answer:
The backward reaction will be endothermic. Thus, the energy factor opposes the backward reaction., As the backward reaction is spontaneous, the randomness factor must favor i.e., ΔS will be positive for the backward reaction or it will be negative for the forward direction.

Thermodynamics Important Extra Questions Long Answer Type

Question 1.
Define
(i) Standard enthalpy of formation.
Answer:
Standard enthalpy of formation: The heat change accompanying the formation of 1 mole df a substance from its elements in their most stable state of aggregation is called its standard enthalpy of formation.
H2(g) + \(\frac{1}{2}\)O2(g) H2O(l); Δf He = 285.8 kJ mol-1

(ii) Standard enthalpy of combustion
Answer:
Standard enthalpy of combustion: It is the heat change accompanying the complete combustion or burning of one mole of a substance in its standard state in excess of air or oxygen.
C4H10(g) + \(\frac{13}{2}\)O2(g) → 4CO2(g) + 5H2O(1); ΔHθ = – 2658.0 kJ mol-1.

(iii) Enthalpy of atomization
Answer:
Enthalpy of atomization: It is defined as the enthalpy change accompanying the breaking of one mole of a substance completely into its atoms in the gas phase.
H2(g) → 2H(g) ΔcHe = 435.0 kJ mol-1

(iv) Enthalpy of solution
Answer:
Enthalpy of solution: It is defined as the heat change when one mole of a substance dissolves in a specified amount of the solvent. The enthalpy of solution at infinite dilution is the enthalpy change observed on dissolving 2 moles of the substance in an infinite amount of the solvent.

(v) Lattice enthalpy
Answer:
Lattice Enthalpy: The lattice enthalpy of an ionic compound is the enthalpy change that occurs when one mole of an ionic compound dissociates into its ions in a gaseous state.
Thermodynamics Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 8

(vi) Thermochemical equation.
Answer:
Thermochemical Equation: A balanced chemical equation together with the value of its A^H is called a thermochemical equation.
Thermodynamics Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 9
The above equation describes the combustion of liquid ethanol. The negative sign indicates that tills are an exothermic reaction. We specify the physical state along with the allotropic state of the substance in a thermochemical equation.

Thermodynamics Important Extra Questions Numerical Problems

Question 1.
For the equilibrium PCl5(g) ⇌ PCl3(g) + Cl2(g) at 298 K, Kc = 1.8 × 10-7. What is ΔG° for the reaction? (R = 8.314 JK-1 mol-1).
Answer:
Thermodynamics Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 10

Question 2.
Calculate the equilibrium constant, K, for the following reaction at 400 K?
2NOCl(g) ⇌ 2NO(g) + Cl2(g)
Given that ΔrH° = 80.0 kJ mol-1 and ΔrS° = 120 JK-1 mol-1.
Answer:
Thermodynamics Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 11

Question 3.
Calculate the standard entropy change for the reaction X ⇌ Y if the value of ΔH° = 28.40 kJ and equilibrium constant is 1.8 × 10-7 at 298 K and ΔrG° = 38.484 kJ.
Answer:
Thermodynamics Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 12
= -33.8 JK-1 mol-1

Question 4.
Calculate the enthalpy of formation of methane, given that the enthalpies of combustion of methane, graphite, and hydrogen are 890.2 kJ, 393.4 kJ, and 285.7 kJ mol-1 respectively.
Answer:
Thermodynamics Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 13
Multiply equation (iii) by 2, add it to equation (ii) and subtract equation (i) from their sum
C + 2H2 → CH4 .
ΔH = – 393.4 + 2(-285.7) – (-890.2)
= – 74.6 kJ mol-1
Hence the heat of formation of methane (CH4) is
ΔfH = – 74.6 kJ mol-1.

Question 5.
CO is allowed to expand isothermally and reversibly from 10 m3 to 20 m3 at 300 K and work obtained is 4.75 KJ. Calculate the number of moles of carbon monoxide (CO). R = 8.314 JK-1 mol-1.
Answer:
Thermodynamics Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 14

Question 6.
Two moles of an ideal gas initially at 27°C and one atm pressure are compressed isothermally and reversible till the final pressure of the gas is 10 atm. Calculate q, w, and AU for the process.
Answer:
Here n = 2; p1 = 1 atm; P2 = 10 atm; T = 300 K
w = 2.303 nRT log \(\frac{\mathrm{P}_{2}}{\mathrm{P}_{1}}\)
= 2.303 × 2 × 8.314 JK mol-1 × 300 K × log \(\frac{10}{1}\)
= 11488 J .

For isothermal compression of ideal gas
ΔU = 0
Further, ΔU = q + w
∴ q = -w = 11488 J.

Question 7.
The heat of combustion of benzene in a bomb calorimeter (i.e. at constant volume) was found to be 3263.9 kJ mol-1 at 25°C. Calculate the heat of combustion of benzene at constant pressure.
Answer:
The given reaction is
C6H6(l) + \(\frac{15}{2}\) O2(g) → 6CO2(g) + 3H2O(l)
C6H6 is a liquid and H20 is a liquid at 25°C.
Thermodynamics Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 15

Question 8.
When 0.532 g of benzene (C6H6) with boiling point 353 K is burnt with an excess of O2 in a calorimeter, 22.3 kJ of heat is given out. Calculate ΔH for the combustion process (R = 8.31 JK-1 mol-1)
Answer:
Thermodynamics Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 16

Question 9.
Specific heat of an elementary gas is found to be 0.313 Jat constant volume. If the molar mass of the gas is 40 g mol-1, what is the atomicity of the gas? R = 8.31 JK-1 mol-1.
Answer:
Thermodynamics Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 17

Question 10.
Calculate the energy needed to raise the temperature of 10.0 g of iron from 25° C to 500°C if the specific heat of iron is 0.45 J (0°C)-1g-1.
Answer:
Energy needed (q) = m × C × ΔT
= 10.0 × 0.45 × (500 – 25) J
= 2137.5 J

Question 11.
Calculate the enthalpy of formation of carbon disulfide given that the enthalpy of combustion of it is 110.2 kJ mol-1 and those of sulfur and carbon are 297.4 kJ and 394.5 kJ/g atoms respectively.
Answer:
Our aim is C(s) + 2S(s) → CS2(l); ΔH =?
Given (i) CS2(l) + 3O2(g) → CO2(g) + 2SO2(g); ΔH = – 110.2 kJ mol-1
(ii) S(s) + O2(g) → SO2(g); ΔH = – 297.4 kj mol-1
(iii) C(s) + O2(g) → CO2(g); ΔH= – 394.5 kj mol-1

Add (iii) + 2(ii) and subtract (i), it gives, on rearranging
C(s) + 2S(s) → CS2(l);
ΔH = (- 394.5) +- 2(- 297.4) – (- 110.2)
= -879.1 kj mol-1

Thus the enthalpy of formation of CS2 = – 879.1 kJ mol-1

Question 12.
There are two crystalline forms of PbO; one is yellow and the other is red. The standard enthalpies of formation of these two forms are – 217.3 and – 219.0 kJ mol-1 respectively. Calculate the enthalpy change for the solid-solid phase transition:
PbO (yellow) → PbO(red)
Answer:
Our aim is PbO (yellow) → PbO (rpd); ΔH =?
Given (i) PbO(s) + \(\frac{1}{2}\)02(g) ) → PbO (yellow); ΔH = – 217.3 kJ mol-1
(ii) Pb(s) + \(\frac{1}{2}\)O2(g) ) → PbO(red); ΔH = —219.0 kJ mol-1

Subtracting (1) from (ii), we get
PbO (yellow) → PbO(red); ΔH =- 219.0 – (- 2173) = – 1.7 kJ mol-1.

Question 13.
The thermite reaction used for welding of metals involves the reaction 2Al (s) + Fe2O3(s) → Al2O3(s) + 2Fe(s)
What is Δr, H° at 25°C for this reaction? Given that the standard heats of formation of Al2O3 and Fe2O3 are – 1675.7 k J and – 828.4 kJ mol-1 respectively.
Answer:
Our aim is 2Al(s) + Fe2O3(s) → Al2O3(s) + 2Fe(s); ΔrH° =?
Thermodynamics Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 18

Question 14.
Calculate the bond enthalpy of HCI. Given that the bond enthalpies of H2 and Cl are 430 and 242 kJ mol-1 respectively and for HCI is -91 kJ mol-1.
Answer:
Thermodynamics Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 19

Question 15.
CaIculat the enthalpy of hydrogenation of C2H2(g) to C2H4(g). Given bond energies: C—H = 414.50 kJ mol-1; C≡C is 827.6 kJ mol-1, C=C is 606.0 kJ mol-1; H—H = 430.5 kJ mol-1.
Answer:
Thermodynamics Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 20
= [827.6 + 2 × 414.0 + 430.5] – [606.0 + 4 × 414.0]
= 175.9 kJ mol-1.

Question 16.
The entropy change for the vaporization of water is 109 JK-1 mol-1. Calculate the enthalpy change for the vaporization of water at 373 K.
Answer:
Δvap H = TΔvap S
= 373 × 109 = 40657 Jmol-1
= 40.657 kJ mol-1

Question 17.
Enthalpy and entropy changes of a reaction are 40.63 kJ mol-1 and 108.8 JK-1 mol-1 respectively. Predict the feasibility of the reaction at 27°C.
Answer:
ΔH = 40.63 kJ mol-1 = 40630 Jmol-1
ΔS = 108.8 JK-1 mol-1
T = 27°C =27 + 273 = 300 K
Now ΔG = ΔH – TΔS
= 40630 – 3 × 108.8 = 7990 J mol-1

Since AG comes out to be positive (i.e., ΔG > 0), the reaction is not feasible at 27°C in the forward direction.

Question 18.
At 0°C ice and water are in equilibrium and ×H = 6.0 kJ mol-1 for the process H2O(s) → H2O(l). What will be ΔS and
ΔG for the conversion of ice to liquid water.?
Answer:
Since the given process is in equilibrium
ΔG = 0
∴ from the equation ΔG = ΔH – TΔS
ΔH becomes = TΔS

∴ ΔS = \(\frac{6000 \mathrm{~J} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}}{273 \mathrm{~K}}\) = 21.98 JK-1 mol-1.

Question 19.
Calculate the standard- free energy for the reaction
4NH3(g) + 5O2(g) → 4NO(g) + 6H2O(l)
Given that the standard free energies of formation (ΔfG°) for NH3(g), NO(g), H2O(l) are – 16.8, + 86.7, and – 237.2 kJ mol-1 respectively. Predict the feasibility of the above reaction at the standard state.
Answer:
Given ΔfG°(NH3) = – 16.8 kJ mol-1, ΔfG°(NO) = + 86.7 kj mol-1; ΔfG°(H2O) = – 237.2 kJ mol-1
Thermodynamics Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 21
= – [4 × ΔfG°(NH3) + 5 × ΔfG°(O2)]
= [4 × 86.7 + 6(- 237.2)] – [4 × (- 16.8) + 5 × 0]
= – 1009.2 kJ
Since ΔrG° is negative, the reaction is feasible.

Question 20.
The value of K for the water gas reaction
CO + H2O ⇌ CO2 + H2 is 1.06 × 105 at 25°C. Calculate the standard free energy change for the reaction at 25°C.
Answer:
ΔrG° = – 2.303 RT log K
= – 2.303 × 8.314 × 298 × log (1.06 × 105)
On solving, ΔrG° = – 28.38 KJ mol-1.

Question 21.
Calculate ΔrG° for the conversion of oxygen to ozone. \(\frac{3}{2}\)O2(g) → O3(g) at 298 K. If Kp for the reaction is 2.47 × 10-29
Answer:
ΔrG° = – 2.303 RT log K
R = 8.314 JK-1 mol-1
∴ ΔfG° = – 2.303 (8-314 JK-1 mol-1) × 298 × (log 2.47 × 10-29)

On solving
ΔrG° = 163000 J mol-1 = 163 kJ mol-1

Question 22.
Find out the value of the equilibrium constant for the following reaction at 298 K. Standard Gibbs energy change, ΔrG° at the given temperature is – 13.6 kJ mol-1.
Answer:
rG° = 2.303 RT log K
Thermodynamics Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 22

Question 23.
For oxidation of iron, 4Fe(s) + 3O2(g) → 2Fe2O3 (s) entropy change is – 549.4 JK-1 mol-1 at 298 K. Inspite .of negative entropy change of this reaction, why is the reaction spontaneous? (ΔrH° = -1648 × 103 J mol-1).
Answer:
The spontaneity of a reaction is determined from ΔStotal
(which is = Δsys + Δsutu)

Now ΔSsurr = – \(\frac{\Delta_{r} \mathrm{H}^{0}}{\mathrm{~T}}\) at constant pressure
= \(\frac{-1648 \times 10^{3}}{298 \mathrm{~K}}\) J mol-1 = 5530 JK-1 mol-1

Thus total entropy change for the reaction is
Δr Stotal = 5530 + (- 549.4) = 4980.6 JK-1 mol-1.
Since the total entropy change is positive, therefore, the above reaction is spontaneous.

Question 24.
A swimmer coming from a pool is covered with a film of water weighing about 18 g. How much heat must be supplied to evaporate this water at 298 K? Calculate the internal energy of vaporization at 100°C. AvapH° for water.
Answer:
Thermodynamics Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 23

No. of moles in 18 g H2O(l) = \(\frac{18 \mathrm{~g}}{18 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}}\) = 1 mol.
Δvap U = Δvap H° – pΔV = ΔvapH – Δng RT (assuming steam behaving as an ideal gas)
Δvap H° – Δng RT = 40.66 kJ mol-1 – (1)(8.314 JK-1 mol-1)(373 K) (10-3 kJ) ,
∴ Δvap U° = 40.66 kJ mol-1 – 3.10 kJ mol-1 = 37.56 kJ mol-1

Question 25.
1 g or graphite is burnt in a bomb calorimeter in excess of oxygen at 298 K and 1 atm pressure according to the reaction
C(graphite) + O2(g) → CO2(g). During the reaction, the temperature rises from 298 to 299 K. If the heat, the capacity of the bomb calorimeter is 20.7 kJ K-1 what is the enthalpy change for the above reaction at 298 K and 1. atm?
Answer:
q = Heat change = Cv × ΔT, where q is the heat absorbed by the calorimeter.
The quantity of heat from the reaction will have the same magnitude, but opposite sign, because heat lost by the system (reaction mixture) is equal to the heat gained by the calorimeter.
∴ q = – Cv × ΔT = – 20.7 kJ K-1 × (299 – 298) K
= -20.7kJ.

Here, negative sign indicates the exothermic nature of the reaction.
Thus, ΔU for the combustion of 1 g of graphite = – 20.7 kJ K-1 For combustion of 1 mol of graphite
= – \(\frac{12.0 \times(-20.7)}{1}\) = – 2.48 × 102 kJ mol-1

Since Δngg = 0
∴ ΔH = ΔU = – 2.48 × 102 kJ mol-1.

Kinetic Theory Class 11 Important Extra Questions Physics Chapter 13

Here we are providing Class 11 Physics Important Extra Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Kinetic Theory. Important Questions for Class 11 Physics with Answers are the best resource for students which helps in Class 11 board exams.

Class 11 Physics Chapter 13 Important Extra Questions Kinetic Theory

Kinetic Theory Important Extra Questions Very Short Answer Type

Question 1.
What does gas constant R signify? What is its value?
Answer:
The universal gas constant (R) signifies the work done by (or on) a gas per mole per kelvin. Its value is 8.31 J mol-1 K

Question 2.
What is the nature of the curve obtained when:
(a) Pressure versus reciprocal volume is plotted for an ideal gas at a constant temperature.
Answer:
It is a straight line.

(b) Volume of an ideal gas is plotted against its absolute temperature at constant pressure.
Answer:
It is a straight line.

Question 3.
The graph shows the variation of the product of PV with the pressure of the constant mass of three gases A, B and C. If all the changes are at a constant temperature, then which of the three gases is an ideal gas? Why?
Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Kinetic Theory 1
Answer:
A is an ideal gas because PV is constant at constant temperature for an ideal gas.

Question 4.
On the basis of Charle’s law, what is the minimum possible temperature?
Answer:
– 273.15°C.

Question 5.
What would be the ratio of initial and final pressures if the masses of all the molecules of a gas are halved and their speeds are doubled?
Answer:
1: 2 (∵ P = \(\frac{1}{3} \frac{\mathrm{mn}}{\mathrm{V}}\)C2)

Question 6.
Water solidifies into ice at 273 K. What happens to the K.E. of water molecules?
Answer:
It is partly converted into the binding energy of ice.

Question 7.
Name three gas laws that can be obtained from the gas equation.
Answer:

  1. Boyle’s law
  2. Charle’s law
  3. Gay Lussac’s law.

Question 8.
What is the average velocity of the molecules of a gas in equilibrium?
Answer:
Zero.

An online Charles law calculator determines the value of initial temperature, final temperature, initial volume, final volume, pressure, ext…

Question 9.
A vessel is filled with a mixture of two different gases. Will the mean kinetic energies per molecule of both gases be equal? Why?
Answer:
Yes. This is because the mean K.E. per molecule i.e. \(\frac{3}{2}\) kT depends only upon the temperature.

Question 10.
Four molecules of a gas are having speeds, v1, v2, v3 and v4.
(a) What is their average speed?
Answer:
Vav = \(\frac{v_{1}+v_{2}+v_{3}+v_{4}}{4}\)

(b) What is the r.m.s. speed?
Answer:
Vrms = \(\sqrt{\frac{v_{1}^{2}+v_{2}^{2}+v_{3}^{2}+v_{4}^{2}}{4}}\)

Question 11.
The density of a gas is doubled, keeping all other factors unchanged. What will be the effect on the pressure of the gas?
Answer:
It will be doubled. (∵ P ∝ ρ if other factors are constant).

Question 12.
What is the average translational K.E. of an ideal gas molecule at a temperature T?
Answer:
\(\frac{3}{2}\) kT, where k is Boltzmann Constant.

Question 13.
Define the mean free path of a molecule.
Answer:
It is defined as the average distance travelled by a molecule between two successive collisions.

Question 14.
At what temperature, Charle’s law breaks down?
Answer:
At very low temperature, Charle’s law breaks down.

Question 15.
A container has an equal number of molecules of hydrogen and carbon dioxide. If a fine hole is made in the container, then which of the two gases shall leak out rapidly?
Answer:
Hydrogen would leak faster as r.m.s. speed of hydrogen is greater than the r.m.s. speed of CO2.

Question 16.
Two different gases have the same temperature. Can we conclude that the r.m.s? velocities of the gas molecules are also the same? Why?
Answer:
No. If temperature is same, then \(\frac{3}{2}\) kT is same. Also \(\frac{1}{2}\) mC2 is same. But m is different for different gases. C will be different.

Question 17.
A gas enclosed in a container is heated up. What is the effect on pressure?
Answer:
The pressure of the gas increases.

Question 18.
What is an ideal gas?
Answer:
It is a gas in which intermolecular forces are absent and it obeys gas laws.

Question 19.
Define absolute zero.
Answer:
It is defined as the temperature at which all molecular motions cease.

Question 20.
What do you understand by the term ‘Collision frequency’?
Answer:
It is the number of collisions suffered by a molecule in one second.

Question 21.
What do you understand by the term ‘mean free path’ of a molecule?
Answer:
It is the average distance travelled by the molecule between two successive collisions.

Question 22.
Mention two conditions when real gases obey the ideal gas equation PV = RT?
Answer:
Low pressure and high temperature.

Question 23.
Comment on the use of water as a coolant.
Answer:
Since water has a high value of specific heat so it can be used as a coolant.

Question 24.
Do Water and ice have the same specific heats? Why water bottles are used for fomentation?
Answer:
No. For water C = 1 cal g-1 °C-1 for ice, C = 0.5 cal g-1°C-1. It is because water has a high value of specific heat.

Question 25.
(a) What is the value of γ for a monoatomic and a diatomic gas?
Answer:
γ is 1.67 and 1.4 for monoatomic and diatomic gas respectively.

(b) Does the value of y depend upon the atomicity of the gas?
Answer:
Yes.

Question 26.
Which of the two has larger specific heat-monoatomic or diatomic gas at room temperature?
Answer:
Diatomic gas has more specific heat than a monoatomic gas e.g. Molar specific heat at constant volume is \(\frac{5}{2}\)R for monoatomic gas and \(\frac{5}{2}\)R for diatomic gas.

Question 27.
What is the effect on the pressure of an if it is compressed at constant temperature?
Answer:
Applying Boyle’s law, we find that the pressure increases.

Question 28.
What is the volume of a gas at absolute zero of temperature?
Answer:
Zero.

Question 29.
Why the pressure of a gas enclosed in a container increases on heating?
Answer:
This is because the pressure of a gas is proportional to the absolute ‘ temperature of the gas if V is constant.

Question 30.
The number of molecules in a container is doubled. What will be the effect on the r.m.s? speed of Slit molecules?
Answer:
No effect.

Question 31.
What will be the effect on K.E. and pressure of the gas in the above quation?
Answer:
Both will be doubled.

Question 32.
Does real gases obey the gas equation, PV = nRT.
Answer:
No.

Question 33.
On what factors does the internal energy of a real gas depend?
Answer:
It depends upon the temperature, pressure and volume of the gas.

Question 34.
What is the pressure of an ideal gas at absolute zero i.e. 0 K or – 273°C.
Answer:
Zero.

Question 35.
What do NTP and STP mean?
Answer:
They refer to a temperature of 273 K or 0°C and 1 atmospheric pressure.

Question 36.
What is the internal energy or molecular energy of an ideal gas at absolute zero?
Answer:
Zero.

Question 37.
Name the temperature at which all real gases get liquified?
Answer:
All real gases get liquified before reaching absolute zero.

Question 38.
Is the internal energy of the real gases sera at the absolute temperature?
Answer:
No.

Kinetic Theory Important Extra Questions Short Answer Type

Question 1.
Why cooling is caused by evaporation?
Answer:
Evaporation occurs on account of faster molecules escaping from the surface of the liquid. The liquid is therefore left with molecules having lower speeds. The decrease in the average speed of molecules results in lowering the temperature and hence cooling is caused.

Question 2.
On reducing the volume of the gas at a constant temperature, the pressure of the gas increases. Explain on the basis of the kinetic theory of gases.
Answer:
On reducing the volume, the space for the given number of molecules of the gas decreases i.e. no. of molecules per unit volume increases. As a result of which more molecules collide with the walls of the vessel per second and hence a larger momentum is transferred to the walls per second. Due to which the pressure of gas increases.

Question 3.
Why temperature less than absolute zero is not possible?
Answer:
According to the kinetic interpretation of temperature, absolute temperature means the kinetic energy of molecules.

As heat is taken out, the temperature falls and hence velocity decreases. At absolute zero, the velocity of the molecules becomes zero i.e. kinetic energy becomes zero. So no more decrease in K.E. is possible, hence temperature cannot fall further.

Question 4.
There are n molecules of a gas in a container. If the number of molecules is increased to 2n, what will be:
(a) the pressure of the gas.
(b) the total energy of the gas.
(c) r.m.s. speed of the gas molecules.
Answer:
(a) We know that
P = \(\frac{1}{3}\)mnC2.
where n = no. of molecules per unit volume.
Thus when no. of molecules is increased from n to 2n, no. of molecules per unit volume (n) will increase from n 2n
\(\frac{n}{V}\) to \(\frac{2n}{V}\), hence pressure will become double.

(b) The K.E. of a gas molecule is,
\(\frac{1}{2}\)mC2 = \(\frac{3}{2}\)kT
If the no. of molecules is increased from n to 2n. There is no effect on the average K.E. of a gas molecule, but the total energy is doubled.

r.m.s speed of gas is Crms = \(\sqrt{\frac{3 \mathrm{P}}{\rho}}=\sqrt{\frac{3 \mathrm{P}}{\mathrm{mn}}}\)

When n ¡s increased from n to 2n. both n and P become double and the ratio \(\frac{P}{n}\) remains unchanged. So there will be no effect of increasing the number of molecule from n to 2n on r.m.s. speed of gas molecule.

Question 5.
Equal masses of O2 and He gases are supplied equal amounts of heat. Which gas will undergo a greater temperature rise and why?
Answer:
Helium is monoatomic while O2 is diatomic. In the case of helium, the supplied heat has to increase only the translational K.E. of the gas molecules.

On the other hand, in the case of oxygen, the supplied heat has to increase the translations, vibrational and rotational K.E. of gas molecules. Thus helium would undergo a greater temperature rise.

Question 6.
Two bodies of specific heats S1 and S2 having the same heat capacities are combined to form a single composite body. What is the specific heat of the composite body?
Answer:
Let m1 and m2 be the masses of two bodies having heat capacities S1 and S respectively.
∴ (m1 + m2)S = m1S1 + m2S2 = m1S1 + m1S1 = 2m1S1

S = \(\frac{2 m_{1} S_{1}}{m_{1}+m_{2}}\).

Also, m2S2 = m1S1
( ∵ Heat capacities of two bodies are same.)
or
m2 = \(\frac{\mathrm{m}_{1} \mathrm{~S}_{1}}{\mathrm{~S}_{2}}\)

∴ S = \(\frac{2 \mathrm{~m}_{1} \mathrm{~S}_{1}}{\mathrm{~m}_{1}+\frac{\mathrm{m}_{1} \mathrm{~S}_{1}}{\mathrm{~S}_{2}}}=\frac{2 \mathrm{~S}_{1} \mathrm{~S}_{2}}{\mathrm{~S}_{1}+\mathrm{S}_{2}}\)

Question 7.
Tell the degree of freedom of:
(a) Monoatomic gas moles.
Answer:
A monoatomic gas possesses 3 translational degrees of freedom for each molecule.

(b) Diatomic gas moles.
Answer:
A diatomic gas molecule has 5 degrees of freedom including 3 translational and 2 rotational degrees of freedom.

(c) Polyatomic gas moles.
Answer:
The polyatomic gas molecule has 6 degrees of freedom (3 translational and 3 rotational).

Question 8.
State law of equipartition of energy.
Answer:
It states that in equilibrium, the total energy of the system is divided equally in all possible energy modes with each mode i.e. degree of freedom having an average energy equal to \(\frac{1}{2}\) kBT.

Question 9.
Explain why it is not possible to increase the temperature of gas while keeping its volume and pressure constant?
Answer:
It is not possible to increase the temperature of a gas keeping volume and pressure constant can be explained as follows:

According to the Kinetic Theory of gases,
Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Kinetic Theory 2
( ∵ C2 = kT, when k is a constant)
T ∝ PV

Now as T is directly proportional to th^ product of P and V. If P and V are constant, then T is also constant.

Question 10.
A glass of water is stirred and then allowed to stand until the water stops moving. What has happened to the K.E. of the moving water?
Answer:
The K.E. of moving water is dissipated into internal energy. The temperature of water thus increases.

Question 11.
Why the pressure of a gas increases when it is heated up?
Answer:
This is due to the two reasons:

  1. The gas molecules move faster than before on heating and so strike the container walls more often.
  2. Each impact yields greater momentum to the walls.

Question 12.
R.m.s. velocities of gas molecules are comparable to those of a single bullet, yet a gas takes several seconds to diffuse through a room. Explain why?
Answer:
Gas molecules collide with one another with a very high frequency. Therefore, a molecule moves along a random and long path to go from one point to another. Hence gas takes several seconds to go from one comer of the room to the other.

Question 13.
Calculate the value of the universal gas constant (R).
Answer:
We know that R is given by
R = \(\frac{PV}{T}\)

Now one mole of all gases at S.T.P. occupy 22.4 litrês.
P = 0.76 m of Hg
= 0.76 × 13.6 × 103 × 9.8
= 1.013 × 105 Nm-2

V = 22.4 litre
= 22.4 × 10 3m3

T = 273 K .
n = 1

∴ R = \(\frac{1.013 \times 10^{5} \times 22.4}{273}\) × 10-3
= 8.31 J mol-1 k-1

Question 14.
Define and derive an expression for the mean free path.
Answer:
It is defined as the average distance travelled by a gas molecule between two successive collisions. It is denoted by X.

Derivation of Expression – Let us assume that only one molecule is in motion and all other molecules are at rest. ,
Let d = diameter of each molecule.
l = distance travelled by the moving molecule.

The moving molecule will collide with all those molecules whose centres lie inside a volume πd2l.
Let n = no. of molecules per unit volume in the gas.
Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Kinetic Theory 3
Now λ = \(\frac{\text { distance travelled }}{\text { no. of collisions }}=\frac{l}{\mathrm{n} \pi \mathrm{d}^{2} l}\)
or
λ = \(\frac{1}{n \pi d^{2}}\) …(1)

In this derivation, we have assumed that all but one molecules are at rest. But this assumption is not correct. All the molecules are in random motion. So the chances of a collision by a molecule are greater.

Thus taking it into account, the mean free path can be shown to be \(\sqrt{2}\) times less than that in equation (1),
∴ λ = \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2} n \pi d^{2}}\)
which is the required expression.

Question 15.
On what parameters does the λ (mean free path) depends?
Answer:
we know that λ = \(\frac{\mathrm{k} \mathrm{T}}{\sqrt{2} \pi \mathrm{d}^{2} \rho}=\frac{\mathrm{m}}{\sqrt{2} \pi \mathrm{d}^{2} \rho}\)

= \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2} \pi \mathrm{nd}^{2}}\)
∴ λ depends upon:

  1. diameter (d) of the molecule, smaller the ‘d’, larger is the mean free path λ,.
  2. λ ∝ T i.e. higher the temperature, larger is the λ.
  3. λ ∝ \(\frac{1}{P}\) i.e. smaller the pressure, larger is the λ.
  4. λ ∝ \(\frac{1}{ρ}\) i.e. smaller the density (ρ), larger will he the X.
  5. λ ∝ \(\frac{1}{n}\) i.e. smaller the number of molecules per unit volume of the gas, larger is the λ.

Question 16.
What causes the Maxwellian distribution of molecular speed?
Answer:
Maxwellian distribution of molecular speed is a statistical phenomenon due to the intermolecular collisions in which the system tends to acquire equilibrium.

Question 17.
Why the pressure of a gas increases on increasing the temperature at constant volume?
Answer:
We know that Crms ∝ \(\sqrt{T}\).

Thus when T is increased, the root means square velocity of gas molecules also increases, thus they move faster and the number of collisions per second with the walls of the container increase and thus pressure increases.

Question 18.
Explain why the temperature of a gas rises when it is compressed?
Answer:
The work is done against pressure during the compression and the velocity of the individual molecules increases, so their K..E. is increased and thus the temperature of the gas is increased.

Question 19.
What determines the average speeds of the molecules of the gases?
Answer:
The average speed of the molecules of the gases depends upon their mass and temperature.

Question 20.
What is the average velocity of the molecules of an ideal gas? Why?
Answer:
The average velocity of the molecules of an ideal gas is zero because the molecules possess all sorts of velocities in all possible directions. Thus their vector sum and hence average value is zero.

Question 21.
A person putting on wet clothes may catch cold-Why?
Answer:
The water in the clothes evaporates. The heat required for evaporation is taken from the body of the person wearing wet clothes. So due to the cooling of the body, he may catch a cold.

Question 22.
At what temperature the molecular speed of the gas molecules should reduce to zero? Does it really happen? Why?
Answer:
The molecular speed should reduce to zero at absolute zero. But such a situation never arises because all gases liquefy before that temperature is attained.

Question 23.
The temperature of the gas in Kelvin is made 9 times. How does it affect the total K.E., average K.E., r.m.s? velocity and pressure?
Answer:
Total K.E., average K.E. and pressure become 9 times, but the RMS velocity is tripled.

Question 24.
Do diatomic molecules have all types of motions? Explain.
Answer:
No. At very low temperature, they have only translatory r motion. At moderate temperature, they possess both translatory and rotatory motion and at very high temperature, all three types of motions are possible.

Question 25.
Why the molecules of an ideal monoatomic gas have only three degrees of freedom?
Answer:
It is so because the molecules of an ideal gas are point masses, so rotational motions are not significant. Thus it can have only three degrees of freedom corresponding to the translatory motion.

Question 26.
The adiabatic expansion causes a lowering of the temperature of the gas. Why?
Answer:
As the gas expands work needs to be done by the gas. The process being adiabatic, no heat is absorbed by the gas from outside, so the energy for doing work is obtained from the gas itself and hence its temperature falls.

Question 27.
What are the different ways of increasing the number of molecular collisions per unit time against the walls of the vessel containing a gas?
Answer:
The number of collisions per unit time .an be increased in the following ways:

  1. By increasing the temperature of the gas.
  2. By increasing the number of molecules.
  3. By decreasing the volume of the gas,

Question 28.
Two identical cylinders contain helium at 2 atmospheres and argon at 1 atmosphere respectively. If both the gases are filled in one of the cylinders, then:
(a) What would be the pressure?
Answer:
(2 + 1) = 3 atmosphere.

(b) Will the average translational K.E. per molecule of both gases be equal?
Answer:
Yes, because the average translational K.E./molecule (\(\frac{3}{2}\)kT) depends only upon the temperature.

(c) Will the r.m.s. velocities are different?
Answer:
Yes, because of the r.m.s. velocity depends not only upon temperature but also upon the mass.

Question 29.
Why hydrogen escapes more rapidly than oxygen from the earth’s surface?
Answer:
We know that Crms ∝ \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{\rho}}\)

Also ρ0 = 16 ρH. So Crms of hydrogen is four times that of oxygen at a given temperature. So the number of hydrogen molecules whose velocity exceeds the escape velocity from earth (11.2 km s-1) is greater than the no. of oxygen molecules. Thus hydrogen escapes from the earth’s surface more rapidly than oxygen.

Question 30.
When a gas is heated, its molecules move apart. Does it increase the P.E. or K.E. of the molecules? Explain.
Answer:
It increases the K.E. of the molecules. Because on heating, the temperature increases and hence the average velocity of the molecules also increases which increases the K.E.

Question 31.
Distinguish between the terms evaporation, boiling and vaporisation.
Answer:
Evaporation: It is defined as the process of conversion of the liquid to a vapour state at all temperatures and occurs only at the surface of the liquid.

Boiling: It is the process of rapid conversion of the liquid to a vapour state at a definite temperature and occurs throughout the liquid.

Vaporisation: It is the general term for the conversion of liquid to vapour state. It includes both evaporation and boiling.

Kinetic Theory Important Extra Questions Long Answer Type

Question 1.
Derive gas laws from the kinetic theory of gases.
Answer:
(a) Boyle’s law: It states that P ∝ \(\frac{1}{V}\) if T = constant.
Derivation: We know from the kinetic theory of gases that
Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Kinetic Theory 4
Here R = constant
If T = constant, then PV = constant
or
P ∝ \(\frac{1}{V}\).

(b) Charles’ law: It states that for a given mass of a gas, the volume of the gas is directly proportional to the absolute temperature of the gas if pressure is constant
i. e. V ∝ T.

Derivation: We know that
PV = \(\frac{1}{3}\)MC2= \(\frac{1}{3}\)mNC2
where N = Avogadro’s no.

Also, we know that mean K..E. of a molecule is
Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Kinetic Theory 5
If P = constant, then V ∝ T. Hence proved.

(c) Avogadro’s Hypothesis: It states that equal volumes of all gases contain equal no. molecules if T and P are the same.

Derivation: Consider two gases A and B having n, and n2 as the no. of molecules, C1 and C2 are the r.m.s. velocities of these molecules respectively.

According to the kinetic theory of gases,
Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Kinetic Theory 6
Also, we know that
Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Kinetic Theory 7
Hence proved.

(d) Graham’s law of diffusion of gases: It states that the rate of diffusion of a gas is inversely proportional to the square root of the density of the gas.
Derivation: We know that
Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Kinetic Theory 8
Also, we know that r.m.s. velocity is directly proportional to the rate of diffusion (r) of the gas, i.e.
Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Kinetic Theory 9

Numerical Problems:

Question 1.
Calculate r.m.s. the velocity of hydrogen at N.T.P. Given the density of hydrogen = 0.09 kg m4.
Answer:
Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Kinetic Theory 10

Question 2.
Calculate the temperature at which r.m.s. the velocity of the gas molecule is double its value at 27°C, the pressure of the gas remaining the same.
Answer:
Let t be the required temperature = ? and Ct, C27 be the r.m.s. velocities of the gas molecules at t°C and 27°C respectively.
\(\frac{\mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{t}}}{\mathrm{C}_{27}}\) = 2 (given)
Also let M = molecular weight of the gas
Now T = t + 273
and T27 = 27 + 273 = 300 K

∴ Using the relation
Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Kinetic Theory 11
Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Kinetic Theory 12

Question 3.
Calculate the K.E./mole of a gas at N.T.P. Density of gas at N.T.P. = 0.178 g dm-3 and molecular weight = 4.
Answer:
Here, ρ = 0.178 g dm-3
= 0.178 × 10-3 g cm-3 (∵ 1 dm3 = 10-3 cm3)
= 178 × 10-6 g cm-3

Volume of 1 mole of gas i.e. 4 g of gas = \(\frac{\text { Mass }}{\text { Density }}\)
Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Kinetic Theory 13

Question 4.
Calculate the diameter of a molecule if n = 2.79 × 1025 molecules per m3 and mean free path = 2.2 × 10-8 m.
Answer:
Here, n = 2.79 × 1025 molecules m-3
λ = 2.2 × 10-8 m
d = ?

Using the relation.
Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Kinetic Theory 14

Question 5.
Calculate the number of molecules in 1 cm3 of a perfect gas at 27°C and at a pressure of 10 mm ofHg. Mean K.E. of a molecule at 27°C = 4 × 1025 J. ρHg = 13.6 × 103 kg m-3.
Answer:
Here, K..E. per molecule at 27°C = 4 × 10-11 J
Let μ = number of molecules in 1 cm3 or 10-6 m3
∴ Mean K.E. per cm3 = μ × 4 × 1011 J ….(i)
Now K.E. per gram molecule = \(\frac{3}{2}\) RT
for a perfect gas, PV = RT

∴ K.E, per gram molecule = \(\frac{3}{2}\) PV
or
K.E. per cm3 of gas = \(\frac{3}{2}\) PV
P = 10 mm of Hg = 10-2 m of Hg
= 10-2 × 13.6 × 103 × 9.8
= 136 × 9.8 Nm-2 V
= 1 cm3
= 10-6 m3

∴ K.E per cm3 of gas = \(\frac{3}{2}\) × 136 × 9.8 × 106
= 1.969 × 10-3 J ….(ii)

∴ from (i) and (ii) we get
μ × 4 × 10-11 = 1.969 × 10-3
or
μ = \(\frac{1.969 \times 10^{-3}}{4 \times 10^{11}}\)
= 4.92 × 107 molecules

Question 6.
Gas at 27°C ¡n a cylinder has a volume of 4 litres and pressure 1oo Nm2.
(a) Gas is first compressed at a constant temperature so that the pressure is 150 Nm2. Calculate the change in volume.
Answer:
Here, V1 = 4 litres = 4 × 10-3 m3
P1 = 100 Nm-2
P2 = 150 Nm-2
V2 =?
T1 = 273 + 27 = 300 K

∴ According to Boyle’s Law
P1V1 = P2V2
or
V2 = \(\frac{P_{1} V_{1}}{P_{2}}=\frac{100 \times 4}{150}\) × 10-3
= 2.667 × 10-3 m3
= 2.667 litre.

∴ Change in volume = V1 – V2
= 4 – 2.667 = 1.333 litre.

(b) It is then heated at a constant volume so that temperature becomes 127°C. Calculate the new pressure.
Answer:
T1 = 300 K
T2 = 273 + 127 = 400 K
P1 = 150 Nm-2
P2 = ?

At constant volume, according to Gay Lussac’s law
Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Kinetic Theory 15

Question 7.
The temperature of a gas is – 68°C. To what temperature should it be heated so that
(a) the average K.E. of the molecules be doubled.
(b) the root mean square velocity of the molecules to be doubled?
Answer:
(a) Let θ°C be the temperature of gas up to which it is heated.
∴ T2 = 273 + θ.
and T1 = 273 + (- 68)
Let E2 and E1 be the average K.E. of the molecules at T2 and T1 respectively.

According to the given condition
\(\frac{\mathrm{E}_{2}}{\mathrm{E}_{1}}\) = 2

Using the relation,
Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Kinetic Theory 16

(b) Let t°C be the temperature up to which the gas is heated.
∴ T3 = 273 + t
and T4 = 273 – 68 = 205 K

Let C1 and C2 be the respective r.m.s. velocities of the molecules.
∴ \(\frac{\mathrm{C}_{1}}{\mathrm{C}_{2}}\) = 2 (given)

Now using the relation
Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Kinetic Theory 17

Question 8.
A balloon contains 500 m3 of He at 27°C and I atm pressure. Find the volume of the helium at 3°C and 0.5 atm pressure?
Answer:
Here, P1 = 1 atm
T1 = 27°C = 273 + 27 = 300 K
V1 = 500 m3
P2 = 0.5 atm
V2 = ?
T2 = – 3°C = 273 – 3 = 270

Using ideal gas equation,
PV = RT, we get
P1V1 = RT1 …(i)
and P2V2 = RT2 …(ii)

Dividing (i) by (ii), we get
Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Kinetic Theory 18

Question 9.
At what temperature will the average velocity of O2 molecules be sufficient so as to escape from earth? Ve = 11.0 km s-1 and mass of one molecule of O2 is 5.34 × 10-26 kg, k = 1.38 × 10-23 JK-1.
Answer:
Here, escape velocity from earth surface,
Ve = 11.0 kms-1
= 11 × 10-3 ms-1
k = 1.38 × 10-23 JK-1

Mass of one O2 molecule, M = 5.34 × 10-26 kg
T = ?
We know that K.E. per molecule is given by
Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Kinetic Theory 19

Question 10.
The volume of the air bubble increases 15 times when it rises from the bottom to the top of a lake. Calculate the depth of the lake if the density of lake water is 1.02 × 103 kg m-3 and atmospheric pressure is 75 cm of Hg.
Answer:
Here, P1 = 75 cm of Hg
= 0.75 × 13.6 × 103 × 9.8 Nm-2
= 99.96 × 103 Nm-2

Let V2 = volume of bubble at depth h = x
i.e. V1 = x + 15x = 16x
P2 = 0.75 m of Hg = hρwater g
= 99.96 × 103 + h × 103 × 9.8

Using Byole’s law,
P1V1 = P2V2, we get
99.96 × 103 × 16x = (99.96 × 103 + h × 103 × 9.8)x
or
h = \(\frac{15 \times 99.96 \times 10^{3}}{9.8 \times 10^{3}}\) = 153 m.

Question 11.
Two glass bulbs of volumes 500 cm3 and 100 cm3 are connected by a narrow tube of negligible volume. When the apparatus is sealed off, the pressure of the air inside is 70 cm of Hg and temperature 20°C. What does the pressure become if a 100 cm3 bulb is kept at 20°C and the other bulb is heated to 100°C?
Answer:
Here, V2 = 500 cm3
V1 = 100 cm3
P1 = P2 = P = ?
T1 = 20°C = 293 K
T2 = 100°C = 373 K
T = 20°C = 293 K
P’ = 70 cm of Hg

For a given mass of the gas,
Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Kinetic Theory 20
Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Kinetic Theory 21

Question 12.
0.014 kg of nitrogen is enclosed in a vessel at a temperature of 27°C. How much heat has to be transferred to the gas to double the r.m.s. the velocity of its molecules?
Answer:
Vrms = \(\sqrt{\frac{3 R T}{M}}\)
Here, T1 = 273 + 27 = 300 K .

Now to double the r.m.s. velocity, the temperature should be raised to four times the initial temperature.
i.e. T2 = 4T, = 4 × 300 K = 1200 K
∴ ΔT = rise in temperature = T2 – T1
= 1200 – 300 – 900 K

k = 1.38 × 10-23 Jk-1
Cv = \(\frac{5}{2}\) R = \(\frac{5}{2}\)(kN)
= \(\frac{5}{2}\) × 1.38 × 10-23 × 6.023 × 1023
= 20.8 JK-1 mol-1 …(i)

∴ If Δθ be the amount of heat required,
Then Δθ = n Cv ΔT
where n = number of moles of nitrogen in 0.014 kg
= \(\frac{1}{0.028}\) × 0.014
= \(\frac{1}{2}\) (∵ 1 mole of N2 = 0.028 Kg)

∴ Δθ = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 20.8 × 900
= 9360 J.

Question 13.
Four molecules of a gas have speeds 4,6,8 and 10 Km s-1 respectively. Calculate their rms speed.
Answer:
Here, C1 = 4 km s-1
C2 = 6 km s-1
C3 = 8 km s-1
C4 = 10 km s-1
C = rms speed = ?
Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Kinetic Theory 22

Question 14.
At what temperature, pressure remaining constant, will the RMS velocity of gas on behalf of its value at 0°C?
Answer:
Here, T1 = 0°C 273 + 0 = 273 K
Let C1 = rmsvelocityat0°C
Let T2 be the temperature (= ?) at which rms velocity becomes half
i.e. C2 = \(\frac{\mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{I}}}{2}\)

Now using the relation, C2 ∝ T. we get
\(\frac{C_{2}^{2}}{C_{1}^{2}}=\frac{T_{2}}{T_{1}}\)
Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Kinetic Theory 23

Question 15.
If the density of nitrogen at S.T.P. be 0.00125 g cm3. What is the velocity of its molecules? g = 980 cm
Answer:
Here, P = 1 atm = 76 cm of Hg
= 76 × 13.6 × 980 dyne cm-2
ρ = density of nitrogen
= 125 × 10-5 g cm-3
Crms = ?

Using the relation,
Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Kinetic Theory 24

Question 16.
At a certain pressure and 127°C, the average K.E. of a hydrogen molecule is 8 × 10-27 J. At the same pressure, determine:
(a) ruts velocity of hydrogen molecules at 27°C.
(b) average K.E. of nitrogen molecules at 127°C.
Mass of hydrogen atom = 1.7 × 10-27 kg.
Answer:
(a) Here, T1 = 127°C = 127 + 273 = 400 K
E1 = 8 × 10-27 J
m = mass of hydrogen molecule
= 2 × 1.7 × 10-27 kg
= 3.4 × 10-27 kg

T2 = 27°C = 27 + 273 = 300 K
E2 = ?

r.m.s velocity at 27°C, Crms = ?
Using the relation,
K.E = E ∝ T, we get
Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Kinetic Theory 25

Also, we know that
Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Kinetic Theory 26
(b) As the average K.E. of a molecule of any gas at the same temperature is the same for all gases, so the average K.E. of nitrogen molecule at 127°C is = 8 × 10-27 J

Question 17.
Calculate the total random K.E. of one gram of nitrogen at 600 K.
Answer:
Here, T = 600 K
R = 8.31 J/mol/K
M = 28 g = molecular weight of nitrogen

∴ Total random K.E. for 1 g molecule of nitrogen is
E’ = \(\frac{3}{2}\)RT

∴ Total random K.E. for one gram of nitrogen
= \(\frac{3}{2} \frac{\mathrm{R}}{\mathrm{M}}\)T
= \(\frac{3}{2}\) × \(\frac{8.31}{28}\) × 600
= 266.8 J.

Question 18.
Find the temperature at which the RMS velocity of oxygen molecules in the earth’s atmosphere equals the velocity of escape from the earth’s gravitational field.
N = 6.023 × 1023
R = 6400 km = radius of earth
k = 1.38 × 10-23 JK-1
Answer:
Here, N = 6.023 × 1023
R = 6400 km = 6400 × 103m
k = 1.38 × 10-23JK-1

Ve = escape velocity from earth’s surface
= \(\sqrt{2 \mathrm{gR}_{\mathrm{e}}}\) ….(i)
T = temperature = ?
Let Crms = rms velocity of oxygen molecules at temp. T0

∴ Using the relation,
Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Kinetic Theory 27

Where m = mass of one molecule = \(\frac{M}{N}\)
k = \(\frac{R}{N}\)

∴ According to the statement,
Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Kinetic Theory 28

Question 19.
Calculate the temperature at which r.m.s. the velocity of a gas molecule is the same as that of a molecule of another gas at 27°C. The molecular weights of the two gases are 64 and 32 respectively.
Answer:
Here, T1 = ? :
T2 = 27°C = 273 + 27 = 300K
M1 = 64 .
M2 = 32
C1 = C2

∴ Using the relation,

\(\frac{1}{2}\)MC2 = \(\frac{3}{2}\)RT,weget
\(\frac{1}{3}\) M1C12= RT1 for gas of mass M1
and \(\frac{1}{3}\)M2C22 = RT2 for gas of mass M2
Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Kinetic Theory 29

Question 20.
Estimate the total number of air molecules (inclusive of oxygen, nitrogen, water vapour and other constituents) in a room of capacity 125.0 m3 at a temperature of 127°C and 2 atm pressure, k = 1.38 × 10-23 JK-1.
Answer:
Here, T = 127°C + 273 = 400 K
k = 1.38 × 10-23 JK-1 P = 2 atmosphere
= 2 × 1.01 × 105 Nm-2
= 2.02 × 105 Nm-2

V = volume of room = 125 m3
N’ = no. of molecules in the room =?
∴ R = Nk = 6.023 × 1023 × 1.38 × 10-23
= 8.31 JK-1 mol-1

Let n = no. of moles of the air in the given volume.
∴ Using gas equation,
PV = nRT, we get
n = \(\frac{\mathrm{PV}}{\mathrm{RT}}=\frac{2.02 \times 10^{5} \times 125}{8.31 \times 400}\)
= 7.60 × 103 moles

∴ N’ = Nn = 6.023 × 1023 × 7.60 × 103
= 45.77 × 1026.

Question 21.
Calculate the temperature at which the oxygen molecules will have the same r.m.s. velocity as the hydrogen molecules at 150°C. The molecular weight of oxygen is 32 and that of hydrogen is 2.
Answer:
Here, Molecular weight of oxygen, M0 = 32
Molecular weight of hydrogen. MH = 2

Let T0 = temp. of oxygen = ?
TH = temp. of hydrogen
= 150°C = 150 + 273 = 423 K
C0 = CH
Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Kinetic Theory 30

Question 22.
Calculate the r.m.s. the velocity of molecules of gas for which the specific heat at constant pressure is 6.84 cal per g mol per °C. The velocity of sound in the gas being 1300 ms-1. R = 8.31 × 107 erg per g mol per °C. J = 4.2 × 107 erg cal-1.
Answer:
Here, Cp = 6.84 cal/g mol/°C
R = 8.31 × 10 erg/g mol/°C
J = 4.2 × 10 erg/cal
v = velocity = 1300 ms-1
= 1300 × 100 cm s-1
Crms =?

Using the relation,
Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Kinetic Theory 31
Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Kinetic Theory 32
Now using the relation,
Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Kinetic Theory 33

Question 23.
Calculate the molecular K.E. of I g of an oxygen molecule at 127°C. Given R = 8.31 JK-1 mol-1. The molecular weight of oxygen = 32.
Answer:
Here, M = 32 g
T = 127 + 273 = 400 K

∴ Molecular K.E. of oxygen is given by
\(\frac{1}{2}\) MC2 = \(\frac{3}{2}\) RT
Now K.E. of 32 g of O2 RT = \(\frac{3}{2}\)RT

∴ K.E.of 1 g of O2 = \(\frac{3}{2} \cdot \frac{\mathrm{RT}}{32}\)
or
E = \(\frac{3}{64}\) × 8.31 × 400 J
= 155.81 J.

Question 24.
Calculate the intermolecular B.E. in eV of water molecules from the following data:
N = 6 × 1023 per mole
1 eV= 1.6 × 10-19 J
L = latent heat of vaporisation of water = 22.6 × 105 J/kg.
Answer:
Here, molecular weight of water, M = 2 + 16 = 18g
∴ No. of molecules in 1 kg of water = \(\frac{6 \times 10^{23}}{18}\) × 1000 = \(\frac{10^{26}}{3}\)

L = 22.6 × 105 J kg
∴ B.E .per molecule = 22.6 × 105 J = B.E of \(\frac{6 \times 10^{23}}{18}\) molecule

Thus B.E. per molecule
Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Kinetic Theory 34

Question 25.
Two perfect gases at absolute temperatures T1 and T2 are mixed. There is no loss of energy. Find the temperature of mixture if masses of molecules are m1 and m2 and the no. of molecules in the gases are n1 and n2 respectively.
Answer:
Let E1 and E2 be the K.E. of the two gases,
∴ E1 = \(\frac{3}{2}\) kT1 × n1
and E2 = \(\frac{3}{2}\) kT2 × n2

Let E be the total energy of the two gases before mixing
∴ E = E1 + E2 = \(\frac{3}{2}\)K(n1T1 + n2T2) ….(1)

After mixing the gases, let T be the temperature of the mixture of the two gases
∴ E’ = \(\frac{3}{2}\)kT(n1 + n2) …(2)

As there is no loss of energy,
Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Kinetic Theory 35

Value-Based Type:

Question 1.
Ram has to attend an interview. He was not well. He took the help of his friend Raman. On the way office, Ram felt giddy, He vomited on his dress. Raman washed his shirt. He made Ram drink enough amount of water. In spite of doing, a foul smell was coming from the shirt. Then Raman purchased a scent bottle from the nearby cosmetics shop and applied to Ram. Ram attended the interview, Performed well. Finally, he was selected.
(a) What values do you find in Raman?
Answer:
He has the presence of mind, serves others in need.

(b) The velocity of air is nearly 500m/s. But the smell of scent spreads very slowly, Why?
Answer:
This is because the air molecules can travel only along a zig-zag path due to frequent collisions. Consequently, the displacement per unit time is considerably small.

Question 2.
One day Shikha got up 7a.ni and saw that the rays of sunlight coming through a narrow hole contains some dust particles which is moving randomly. She kept it her mind and when she reached her school the next day, she first asked her physics teacher the reason behind it. The teacher explained that gas consists of rapidly moving atoms or molecules. The particles may also collide with each other when they come together. She becomes happy to hear the reason. ‘
(i) What values are exhibited by Shikha?
Answer:
Creative, Awareness, willing to know the scientific reasons.

(ii) What is r.m.s velocity?
Answer:
The root mean square speed (r.m.s) of gas molecules is defined as the square root of the mean of squares of the speeds of gas molecules.
i.e Vrms = \(\sqrt{\frac{V_{1}^{2}+V_{2}^{2}+V_{3}^{2}+\ldots \ldots \ldots \ldots \ldots .+V_{n}^{2}}{n}}\)
= \(\sqrt{\frac{3 \mathrm{~K}_{\mathrm{B}} \mathrm{T}}{\mathrm{m}}}\)

(iii) Calculate r.m.s velocity of one gram molecule of hydrogen at S.T.P. [density of hydrogen at S.T.P = 0.09 kg m-3]
Answer:
According to kinetic theory .of gases:
P = \(\frac{1}{3}\)ρC2
or
C = \(\sqrt{\frac{3 \mathrm{P}}{\rho}}\)

Here, ρ = 0.09 kg m-3, P = 1.01 × 105 Pa.
∴ C = \(\sqrt{\frac{3 \times 1.01 \times 10^{5}}{0.09}}\)
= 1837.5 ms-1

Question 3.
During the lecture of physics period, Madan’s teacher Mr Suresh has given a question to the whole class. The question was as under:
“A vessel contains two non-reactive gases: neon (monoatomic) and oxygen (diatomic). The ratio of their partial pressure is 3:2.
Estimate the ratio of
(a) Number of molecules
(b) Mass density
Madan raised his hand to answer the above two questions and gave a satisfactory answer to the question. .
(i) What value is displayed by Madan?
Answer:
He is intelligent, Creative, Sharp minded.

(ii) What explanations would have been given by Madan?
Answer:
(a) Since V and T are common to the two gases
Also, P1V = μ1 RT ….(i)
P2V = μ2 RT….(ii)

[Using ideal gas equation]
Here, 1 and 2 refer to neon and oxygen respectively
i.e \(\frac{P_{1}}{P_{2}}=\frac{\mu_{1}}{\mu_{2}}\)
⇒ \(\frac{3}{2}=\frac{\mu_{1}}{\mu_{2}}\) {∵ \(\frac{P_{1}}{P_{2}}=\frac{3}{2}\)(given)}

(b) By definition μ1 =\(\frac{\mathrm{N}_{1}}{\mathrm{~N}_{\mathrm{A}}}\) and \(\frac{\mathrm{N}_{2}}{\mathrm{~N}_{\mathrm{A}}}\) where N1 and N2 are the number of molecules of 1 and 2 and NA is the Avogadro’s number.
∴ \(\frac{N_{1}}{N_{2}}=\frac{\mu_{1}}{\mu_{2}}=\frac{3}{2}\)

Question 4.
A quiz contest was organized by a public school. They asked rapid-fire questions and decided to give lst, 2nd and 3rd prizes. The entire class was divided into ten groups and each group has S students.
The questions in the final round were as under:
(i) What is the ideal gas equation?
Answer:
The relationship between Pressure P, Volume V and absolute temperature T of a gas is called its equation of state. The equation of the state of an ideal gas is
PV = μRT

(ii) What would be the effect on the RMS velocity of gas molecules if the temperature of the gas is increased by a factor of 4?
Answer:
Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Kinetic Theory 36
Clearly, ‘C’ will be doubled.

(iii) Which values are being depicted here by the school by ask¬ing the above questions?
Answer:
Values are:
(a) To develop group activity.
(b) To teach in an interesting way.
(c) Award and prizes to motivate them.
(d) To develop leadership quality.

Equilibrium Class 11 Notes Chemistry Chapter 7

By going through these CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes Chapter 7 Equilibrium, students can recall all the concepts quickly.

Equilibrium Notes Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 7

Chemical equilibria are important in numerous biological and environmental processes. For example, equilibria involving O2 molecules and the protein hemoglobin play a crucial role in the transport and delivery of O2 from our lungs to our muscles. Similarly, equilibria involving CO molecules and hemoglobin account for the toxicity of CO.

In the case of evaporation of water in a closed vessel, the no, of molecules leaving the surface of water equals the no. of molecules of H2O returning to liquid state from the vapor state. This is an equilibrium state. However, this equilibrium state is not static. It is Dynamic equilibrium. Thus at equilibrium, the rate of evaporation is equal to the rate of condensation. It may be represented by
H2O (l) ⇌ H2O (vap)

The mixture of reactants and products in the equilibrium state is called an equilibrium mixture.

The state of chemical equilibrium in a chemical reaction may be classified into three groups characterized by the extent to which the reactions proceed.

  1. The reactions proceed nearly to completion and only negligible concentrations of the reactants are left.
  2. The reactions in which only some amount of products are formed and most of the reactants remain unchanged at equilibrium stage.
  3. The reactions in which concentrations of the reactants and products are comparable when the system is at equilibrium.

Equilibrium in Physical processes
1. Solid-Liquid Equilibrium: For example
ice ⇌ water
i.e. H2O(s) ⇌ H2O(l)
At equilibrium, rate of melting = rate of freezing.

The temperature at which the solid and liquid forms of any substance coexist is called the melting point.
2. Liquid-Vapour Equilibrium: For example
H2O(l) ⇌ H2O(g)
At equilibrium: rate of evaporation = rate of condensation.

3. Equilibrium involving dissolution of solids of gases in liquids: Different solids dissolve in any solvent to different extents. Certain solids dissolve more, while many others dissolve less.

The maximum mass (in grams) of a solute which can be dissolved in 100 g of a solvent at any temperature and pressure is called its solubility at that temperature and pressure,
(a) Solids in liquids: When a small quantity of sugar is added to some water (say 100 mL) it gets dissolved. When a little more sugar is added, it also gets dissolved. If the addition of sugar is continued, then a stage comes when no more sugar dissolves, and the added sugar settles down.

The solution at this stage contains the maximum amount of sugar the solution can have at that temperature. This solution is called a saturated solution of sugar. In a saturated solution
Sugar (s) N ⇌ Sugar (aq)
of sugar in contact with solid sugar, a dynamic equilibrium is established. At the equilibrium state, the number of sugar molecules going into the solution from the solid sugar is equal to the number of molecules precipitating out from the solution at a given temperature. Thus at equilibrium.

Rate of dissolution of solid sugar = Rate of precipitation of sugar from the solution.

(b) Gases in Liquids: Gases dissolve in liquids. The solubility of a gas in any liquid depends upon.

  • nature of the gas and that of the liquid.
  • the temperature of the liquid
  • pressure of the gas over the surface of the solution.

The effect of pressure on the solubility of a gas in a liquid is described by Henry’s Law.

Henry law states that,
“At a certain temperature, the mass of a gas which dissolves in a definite volume of a liquid is proportional to the pressure of the gas over the solution.”

If p is the pressure of the gas over the solution, m is the mass of the gas dissolved in one unit volume of the liquid.
Then, according to Henry’s law
m ∝ p
or
m = kp
where k is the proportionality- constantly called Henry’s Law constant.

equilibrium concentration calculator quantity for each species from the initial quantity and the change.

4. General Characteristics of Equilibria involving Physical Processes:
It has been noted that
(a) for liquid-vapor equilibrium, the vapor pressure is constant at t given temperature.
(b) for solid-liquid equilibrium, there is only one temperature (melting point) at 1 atm at which the two phases can coexist. If there is no exchange of heat with the surroundings, the mass of the two phases remains constant.
(c) for dissolution of solids in liquids the solubility is constant at a given temperature.
(d) for dissolution of gases in liquids, the concentration of a gas in a liquid is proportional to the pressure (concentration)! of the gas over the liquid.

Table: Some Features of Physical Equilibria

Process Conclusion
Liquid ⇌ Vapour
H2O (l)   ⇌ H2O (g)
PH2O constant at a given temperature.
Solid ⇌ Liquid
H2O (s)  ⇌ H2O (l)
The melting point is fixed at constant pressure.
Solute (s) ⇌ Solute solution)
Sugar (s) ⇌ Sugar (solution)
The concentration of solute in a solution is constant at a given temperature.
Gas (g) ⇌ gas (aq)
For’example,
CO2 (g) ⇌ CO2 (acl)
[gas (aq)]/[gas (g)] is constant at a given temperature.
[CO2 (aq)] /[CO2 (g)] is constant at a given temperature.

For the physical processes discussed above following characteristics are common to the system of equilibrium.

  1. Equilibrium is possible only in a closed system at a given temperature.
  2. Both the opposing processes occur at the same rate and there is a dynamic but stable condition. ,
  3. All measurable properties of the system remain constant.
  4. When equilibrium is attained for a physical process, it is characterized by the constant value of one of its parameters at a given temperature.
  5. The magnitude of such quantities at any stage indicates the extent to which the physical process has proceeded before reaching equilibrium.

Equilibrium in Chemical Processes-Dynamic Equilibrium
Similar to physical systems, chemical reactions also attain a state of equilibrium. These reactions can proceed both in the forward direction as well as backward direction. When rates in both directions become equal, the concentrations of reactants and products remain constant. This is the stage of chemical equilibrium.

Let there be a reversible reaction
A + B ⇌ C + D
With time, concentrations of A and B decrease, and those of C and D increase. This leads to a decrease in the rate of forwarding direction and increases in the rate of backward direction. When both the rates become equal, the system reaches a state of equilibrium.
Equilibrium Class 11 Notes Chemistry 1

Characteristic of Chemical Equilibrium:

  1. The equilibrium state is reached only if the process is carried out in a closed vessel.
  2. It is dynamic equilibrium, i.e., at this stage the reaction, although appears to be stopped, actually takes place in both directions with the same speed.
  3. An equilibrium state can be approached from both sides.
  4. At equilibrium state/composition of the reactants and products remain constant.

3. Law of Chemical Equilibrium and Equilibrium Constant: Goldberg and Waage proposed that for a general reversible reaction
A + B ⇌ C + D

the following Equilibrium equation holds:
KC = \(\frac{[\mathrm{C}] \times[\mathrm{D}]}{[\mathrm{A}] \times[\mathrm{B}]}\)
where Kc is called equilibrium constant and the expression on the right side is called equilibrium constant expression.

The above equation is also called the Law of Mass Action because concentration was earlier referred to as active mass.

→ Law of mass action: It states that under a given set of conditions, the rate of a chemical reaction is directly proportional to the product of the concentration (active mass) of the reacting substances.
Active mass (Molar concentration) = \(\frac{\text { No. of moles }}{\text { Vol. in litres }}\)

The active mass of a gas or liquid means its molar concentration, while the active mass of a solid is always taken as unity, irrespective of the quantity.

The Law of mass action is applicable only to reversible reactions.
Let us consider a general reversible reaction
aA + bB ⇌ cC + dD
The rate of forwarding reaction = Kf [A]a[B]b
Similarly, the rate of backward reaction = Kf [C]c[D]d
where and Kf and Kb be the respective rate constants.

Since at equilibrium, the rate of both reactions are equal
Kf[A]a[B]b = Kf[C]c[D]d
\(\frac{\mathrm{K}_{f}}{\mathrm{~K}_{b}}=\frac{\left[\mathrm { C } \left[^{c}[\mathrm{D}]^{d}\right.\right.}{[\mathrm{A}]^{a}[\mathrm{~B}]^{b}}\)
or
K = \(\frac{[\mathrm{C}]^{\mathrm{c}}[\mathrm{D}]^{d}}{[\mathrm{~A}]^{a}[\mathrm{~B}]^{b}}\)
where K is.called equilibrium constant.

Characteristics of the equilibrium constant:
1. Its value is independent
(a) of the original concentration of the reactants.
(b) of volume.
(c) of the presence of inert materials.
(e) of the direction from which equilibrium is attained.
(f) of the nature and number of steps in the reaction as long as stoichiometry is not changed.

2. It has a definite value at a given temperature and changes with temperature.

For a reversible reaction at equilibrium; the ratio of the product of concentrations of the products to the product of concentrations of the reactants when each concentration term is raised to a power equal to the corresponding stoichiometric coefficient in the balanced chemical equation at a constant temperature is constant. This constant is called the Equilibrium Constant.

For a homogeneous chemical reaction aA + bB ⇌ cD + dD
when concentrations of reactants and products are expressed in moles per liter units represented by [ A], |B], [Cl, [D] (their active masses), the equilibrium constant is written as KC and is given by
KC = \(\frac{[C]^{c} \times[D]^{d}}{[A]^{a} \times[B]^{b}}\)

Further, if the reaction is a homogeneous gas-phase reaction then the molar concentration of a substance is directly proportional to Kp
Kp = Kc × (RT)Δn
If Δn = 1,then Kp = Kc × RT

(c) If Δn < 0, i.e. when the no. of moles of reactants is more than that of products or when the reaction proceeds with a decrease in the no. of moles
Equilibrium Class 11 Notes Chemistry 2
→ Units of Equilibrium Constant: The unit of K depends upon the number of moles of reactants and products involved in the reaction.
1. When a total number of moles of products is equal to the number of moles of reactants, K has no units. For example.
N2 (g) + O2 (g) ⇌ 2NO (g)
K = \(\frac{[\mathrm{NO}(\mathrm{g})]^{2}}{\left[\mathrm{~N}_{2}(\mathrm{~g})\right]\left[\mathrm{O}_{2}(\mathrm{~g})\right]}\)

= \(\frac{[\mathrm{mol} / \mathrm{L}]^{2}}{[\mathrm{~mol} / \mathrm{L}][\mathrm{mol} / \mathrm{L}]}\) = no units.

2. When/ the total number of moles of products is different than the total number of moles of reactants. In such reactions, K has units. For example,
N2 (g) + 3H2 (g) ⇌ 2NH3 (g)
Equilibrium Class 11 Notes Chemistry 3
Value of Kp for Some reactions
Equilibrium Class 11 Notes Chemistry 4
→ Homogeneous Equilibrium: A reversible reaction in which all the reactants and products at equilibrium are in the same phase is called a homogeneous equilibrium.
(a) In the gas phase
Equilibrium Class 11 Notes Chemistry 5
(b) In the liquid phase: Here, all the reactants and products are liquids that are miscible in one another. They may take place in an open or closed vessel.
CH3COOH (l) + C2H5OH (l) ⇌ CH3COOC2H5 (l) + H2O (l)
KC = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{CH}_{3} \mathrm{COOC}_{2} \mathrm{H}_{5}\right]\left[\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}\right]}{\left[\mathrm{CH}_{3} \mathrm{COOH}(\mathrm{l})\right]\left[\mathrm{C}_{2} \mathrm{H}_{5} \mathrm{OH}(1)\right]}\)

(c) In the solution phase: Here the reactants and products are present in a solution. The choice of the solvent depends upon the nature of the reaction.
I2 (aq) + r (aq) ⇌ I3 (aq)
iodine iodine ion tri iodide ion
2H2O (l) ⇌ H3+O (aq) + OH (aq)
Fe3+ (aq) + SCN (aq) ⇌ [Fe(SCN)]2+ (aq)

Heterogeneous Equilibrium: A reversible reaction involving equilibrium between various chemical species present in two or more phases is said to be a heterogeneous chemical equilibrium. It may be noted here that all solids constitute separate phases.
Examples:
Equilibrium Class 11 Notes Chemistry 6
and [CaO] are both constants.

Here CaCO3 and CaO are in solid phases and CO2 is in the gaseous phase; [CaCO3] = 1 and [CaO] = 1
(b) 3Fe (s) + 4H2O (g) ⇌ Fe3O4 (s) + 4H2 (g)
Equilibrium Class 11 Notes Chemistry 7
where PH2 and PH2O are the partial pressures of H2 (g) and H2O (g) at eqbm.

(c) Pb2+ (aq) + CrO24- (aq) ⇌ PbCrO4 (s)

(d) 2Hg (s)+ O2 (g) ⇌ 2HgO (s)

(e) for the reaction
Ni (s) + 4CO (g) ⇌ Ni(CO)4 (g)
KC = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{Ni}(\mathrm{CO})_{4}\right]}{[\mathrm{CO}]^{4}}\)

(f) Ag2O (s) + 2HNO3 (aq) ⇌ 2AgNO3 (aq) + H2O (l)
KC = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{Ag} \mathrm{NO}_{3}\right]^{2}}{\left[\mathrm{H} \mathrm{NO}_{3}\right]^{2}}\)

Applications of Equilibrium constants:
1. Predicting the direction and extent of reaction from the magnitude of the equilibrium constant: The magnitude of the equilibrium constant K of a reaction indicates how far a reaction can go and in which direction.

For example aA + bB ⇌ cC + dD is given by
K = [C]c × [D]d /[A]a[B]b
where all concentrations are at equilibrium. It is dear that the larger the value of K, the greater will be the equilibrium concentration of- the components on the R.H.S. of the reaction (products) relative to those on the L.H.S. (reactants).

Thus the value of K provides information about the extent and direction of the reaction.
(a) When K > > 1: When the value of K is very high such as; 107 – 1015 or more, the reactions proceed to almost completion. In such reactions, almost the whole of the reacting substances gets converted into products.

(b) When K > 1: When the value of K is greater than one (but not too large), the reaction in the forward direction is favored more than the reaction in the backward direction. In such cases, the equilibrium concentration of products is higher than that of the reactants.

(c) When K = 1: When the value of K is equal to one, both the direction of the reaction are almost equally favored. In such cases the equilibrium concentrations of reactants and products are comparable.

(d) When K < 1: When the value of K is smaller than one, the reaction in the backward direction is favored. In such cases, the equilibrium concentrations of reactants will be much higher than the concentration of the products.

2. Calculating Equilibrium Concentrations: Once the value of the equilibrium constant for a reaction is known, we can use it to calculate the concentration of a substance (reactant or product) in the equilibrium mixture.

Relationship between Equilibrium Constant K, Reaction Quotient Q, and Gibbs Energy G

The value of KC for a reaction does not depend upon the rate of the reaction. It is directly related to the thermodynamics of the reaction and in particular to the change in Gibbs energy, ΔG. If,

  1. ΔG is negative, the reaction is spontaneous and proceeds in the forwarding direction. ’
  2. ΔG is positive, the reaction is non-spontaneous. Instead, the products of the forward reaction shall be converted to the reactants, as ΔG will have a negative value for the reverse direction.
  3. ΔG is 0, the reaction has achieved equilibrium, at this point, there is no longer any free energy left to drive the reaction.

Mathematically
ΔG = ΔG° + RT InQ, where G° is standard Gibbs energy
At equilibrium, when ΔG = 0 and Q = KC, the above equation becomes
ΔG = ΔG° + RT InK = 0
or ΔG° = – RT InK.
InK = – ΔG°/RT

Taking antilog
K = e-ΔG°/RT … (1)

Hence using the equation (1), the reaction spontaneity can be interpreted in terms of the value of ΔG°
1. If ΔG° < 0, then – ΔG/RT is positive and e-ΔG°/RT > 1 making K > 1. It implies a reaction in the forward direction or a spontaneous reaction.

2. If ΔG° > 0, then – ΔG°/RT is negative and e-ΔG°/RT < 1, that is K < 1 which implies a non-spontaneous reaction or a reaction which proceeds in the forward direction to such a small degree that only a very minute quantity of product is formed.

Factors affecting Equilibria:
1. Let Chatelier’s principle: “Whenever a system in equilibrium is subjected to a change in temperature,, pressure or composition, the equilibrium shifts in a direction so as to undo the effect of the change applied”.

2. Effect of concentration change: If a system is at equilibrium and the concentration of one of the species involved in the reaction is increased then the system will readjust so as decrease the concentration of that species. Thus/if the concentration of substance involved in the equilibrium is increased, the increased concentration, Similarly, if the concentration of some substances is decreased, the reaction will proceed so as to make up the loss in the concentration.

Let us consider the-reaction
aA + bB ⇌ cC + dD

At equilibrium, the concentration of A, B, C, and D are constant. If to this reaction at equilibrium, a small amount of the substance A is added, then according to Le Chatelier’s principle, the equilibrium shifts in a direction so as to undo the effect of the increased concentration of A. That is, the reaction proceeds in the d.rection so as to decrease the concentration of A.

This can be done only by making more A react with B to form more products. That is, an increase in the concentration of A (or any reactant) will shift the equilibrium towards the right, (products side). On the other hand, when the concentration of C (or any other product) is increased, the reaction will shift towards the left (reactant side).

Thus, in general, an increase in the concentration of any of the substances on one side of the equilibrium shifts the equilibrium to produce more of the substances on the other side of it.

3. Effect of Pressure Change: Change of pressure has no significant effect on the following equilibria:
(a) The equilibria involving only solids are not affected by a change of pressure because there is virtually no change in volume due to a change in pressure.

(b) The equilibria involving liquids and/or gases where the number of moles before and after the attainment of equilibrium remains the same, i.e., when Δn = 0, also are not affected by a change of pressure. When the pressure on a reaction involving gases (where Δn ≠ 0) is changed, the equilibrium will shift in a direction so as to undo the effect of change in pressure. For example, an increase in pressure will cause a decrease in volume.

So, an increase of pressure on a gaseous system will shift the equilibrium in a direction of a decrease in volume, and vice versa. Therefore, in a reaction which proceeds with a decrease in volume (Δn = -ve), the equilibrium will shift in the forward direction by increasing pressure.

On the other, hand, in a reaction which proceeds with an increase – in volume (Δn = +ve), the equilibrium will shift towards the right by decreasing the pressure.

4. Effect of Temperature Change: According to the Le Chatelier principle when the temperature of a system at equilibrium is increased, i.e., the heat is supplied to the system, the system should move in a direction so that the added heat is absorbed. So, an increase in the temperature of a chemical system at equilibrium favors the reaction that proceeds with the absorption of heat, i.e., an endothermic reaction is favored.

On the other hand, if the temperature of the system is decreased under constant pressure and volume conditions, the equilibrium – will shift in such a way so as to produce some heat. Thus, a decrease in the temperature of a system at equilibrium favors the reaction which proceeds with the evolution of heat, i.e., an exothermic reaction is favored.

For example, the reaction
N2 (g) + 3H2 (g) ⇌ 2NH3 (g); ΔH = – 93.6 kj is exothermic in the forward direction and endothermic in the backward direction.

Let the temperature of the system at equilibrium be increased. Then, according to Le Chatelier’s principle, the equilibrium will shift in a direction heat is absorbed, i.e., in the endothermic direction. Therefore, on increasing temperature, the reaction will shift towards the left (reactant side). Thus, an increase in the temperature of this reaction will result in the formation of a lesser amount of ammonia.

On the other hand, a decrease in the temperature of this system will favor the endothermic direction of the equilibrium. Thus, when the temperature of this system is lowered, the equilibrium will shift in the forward direction, i.e., more ammonia will be produced.

5. Effect of a Catalyst: Catalyst has no effect on the equilibrium concentrations of the reactants and products. In fact, a catalyst accelerates the forward and the backward reactions to the same extent and therefore, simply helps’1 in the. attainment of the equilibrium state faster.

Inert gas added keeping the pressure of the system constant: In this gas, the addition of an inert gas increases the volume of the system, which in turn, causes the equilibrium position of the system to move in the direction of a large number of gaseous molecules. Thus, we will have
Equilibrium Class 11 Notes Chemistry 8
→ Inert gas added keeping the volume of the system constant: Addition of inert gas into a system at equilibrium under constant volume causes

  1. an increase in the pressure of the system
  2. an increase in the total number of moles in the system.

The total pressure of a system is therefore given by
Ptotal V = ntotal RT
or
\(\frac{n_{\text {total }}}{P_{\text {total }}}=\frac{V}{R T}\)

Under constant-volume at any temperature, the ratio total/Ptotal remains constant even on the addition of inert gas. As a result, there is no change in any of the variables and the amounts of the substances at equilibrium remain unaffected by the addition of inert gas, i.e., the equilibrium position of the reaction remains unaffected.

Concentration Quotient or Reaction Quotient and predicting the direction of reaction:
For the reaction aA + bB ⇌ cC + dD at any stage of the reaction, other than the stage of chemical equilibrium, concentration ratio [C]c[D]d / [A]a[B]b is called concentration quotient or reaction quotient.

It is usually represented by Qc or Q. Thus concentration quotient Qc = [C]c × [D]d/[A]a[B]b

  1. If Q = K, the reaction is in equilibrium.
  2. If Q > K, Q will tend to decrease so as to become equal to K. As a result the reaction will proceed in the Backward direction.
  3. If Q < K, Q will tend to increase. As a result, the reaction will proceed in the forward direction.

Consider the gaseous reaction of H2 and I2,
H2 (g) + I2 (g) ⇌ 2HI (g) Kc = 57.0 at 700 K.

Suppose we have molar concentrations
[H2]t = 0.10 M, [I2]t = 0.2 M and [HI]t = 0.40 M.
(the subscript t on the concentration symbols means that the concentrations were measured at some arbitrary time t, not necessarily at equilibrium).

Thus, the reaction quotient; Qt at this stage of the reaction is given by,
Qt = [HI]t2/|H2]t[I2]t = (0.40)2/(0.10) × (0.20) = 8.0.

Now, in this case, Qc(8.0), does not equal Kc (57.0), so the mixture of H2 (g), I2 (g), and HI (g) is most at equilibrium; that is, more H2 (g) and I2 (g) will react to form more HI (g) and their concentrations will decrease till Qc = Kc.
Equilibrium Class 11 Notes Chemistry 9
Predicting the direction of the reaction

The reaction quotient, Qf is useful, we can predict the direction of reaction by comparing the values of Qc and Kc
Thus, we can make the following generalizations concerning the direction of the reaction:

  • If Qr < Kt. net reaction goes from left to right.
  • If Qr > Kc, the net reaction goes from right to left.
  • If Qr = Kf, no net reaction occurs.

Problem (1)
The value of ΔG° for the phosphorylation of glucose in glycolysis is 13.8 kJ/mol. Find the value of at 298 K?
Solution: ΔG° = 13.8 kJ/mol = 13.8 × 103 J/mol
Also, ΔG° = – RT InKc.

Hence, InKc = – 13.8 × 103 J/mol/8.31 Jmol-1 × 298 K
InKc = – 5.569
Kc = e – 5.569
Kc = 3.81 × 10-3

Problem (2)
Hydrolysis of sucrose gives,
Sucrose + H2O ⇌ Glucose + Fructose
Equilibrium constant Kc for the reaction is 2 × 1013 at 300 K. Calculate ΔG° at 300 K?
Answer:
ΔG° = – RT ln Kf
ΔG° = – 8.314 J mol-1 K-1 × 300 K × In (2 × 1013)
ΔG° = – 7.64 × 104 J mol-1

→ Ionic Equilibrium: There are substances that conduct electricity in their molten states or in the form of their aqueous solutions. These are called electrolytes. On the other hand, there are substances that do not conduct electricity in the molten states or in the form of their aqueous solutions and these are called non-electrolytes.

→ Strong and Weak Electrolytes: Depending upon the extent of ionization, the electrolytes may be divided into two classes: strong electrolytes and weak electrolytes.
1. Strong electrolytes: The substance which ionizes almost completely into ions in an aqueous solution are called strong electrolytes.

For example, HCl, H2SO4 HNO3 NaOH, KOH, NaCl, KNO3, etc. are strong electrolytes.
HCl + H2O → H3O+ + Cl
HNO3 + H2O → H3O+ + NO3

(ii) Weak electrolytes: The substances which ionize to a small extent in an aqueous solution are called weak electrolytes. For example, CH3COOH, NH4OH, (NH4)2 CO3, HCN, etc. are weak electrolytes.
CH3COOH + H2O ⇌ H3O+ + CH3COO
NH3 + H2O ⇌ NH4+ + OH

Ionization of weak electrolytes: Weak electrolytes are only partially ionized and a dynamic equilibrium is established between the ions and the unionized molecules. The equilibrium which is established between the unionized molecules and the ions in the solution of weak electrolytes is called ionic equilibrium,

The fraction of the total number of molecules of an electrolyte which \ ionizes into ions is called the degree of ionization or degree of dissociation.

It is denoted by the symbol an (alpha).
Degree of ionisation,
α = \(\frac{\text { Number of molecules of the electrolyte which ionise }}{\text { Total number of molecules of the electrolyte }}\)

Dissociation or Ionisation Constant for Weak Electrolytes: Consider a weak electrolyte CH3COOH in equilibrium with its ions when dissolved in water as
CH3COOH (aq) + H2O (l) ⇌ CH3COO (aq) + H3O+ (aq)

The equilibrium constant K, is
Ka = \(\frac{c \alpha^{2}}{1-\alpha}\)

Since the degree of dissociation of a weak acid is very small as compared to 1, then 1 – α may be taken approximately equal to 1.
K = cα2
α = \(\)\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{K}_{a}}{c}} ∴ [H3O+] = ca = \(\sqrt{\mathrm{K}_{a} c}\)

Thus, knowing the ionisation the ionisation constant Ka, degree of ionisation can be calculated.

Similarly, for a weak base, if the ionisation constant is Kb, c is the concentration and α is the degree of ionisation, then
Kb = \(\frac{c \alpha^{2}}{1-\alpha}\)
or
α = \(\sqrt{\frac{K_{b}}{c}}\)(1 – α) ≈ 1

Acids, Eases and Salts:
1. Arrhenius Acids and Bases: Arrhenius defined acids as substances that produce hydrogen ions in water and bases that produce hydroxyl ions. Thus, according to the Arrhenius concept, hydrogen chloride, acetic acid, and sulphuric acid, are acids because all these compounds give free H+ ions in an aqueous solution.
HCl (g) + H2O (excess) ⇌ H+ (aq) + Cl (aq)
H2SO4 + H2O (excess) ⇌ 2H+ (aq) + SO2-4 (aq)
CH3COOH + H2O (excess) ⇌ H+ (aq) + CH3COO (aq)

The compounds such as NaOH and NH4OH are bases because these compounds give free OH- ions in aqueous solutions.
NaOH + H2O (excess) ⇌ Na+ (aq) + OH (aq)
NH4OH + H2O (excess) ⇌ NH4+ (aq) + OH (aq)

Ionization of Acids and Bases
→ The Bronsted-Lowry Acids and Bases: Any hydrogen-containing species (a molecule, a cation, or an anion) which is capable of donating one or more protons to any other substance is called an acid.

Any species (molecule, cation, or anion) which is capable of accepting one or more protons from acid is called a base.
Thus, according to the Bronsted-Lowry concept, an acid is a proton donor, and. a base is a proton acceptor.

Let us consider the dissolution of hydrogen chloride (HCl) in water described by the reaction
HCl (aq) + H2O (1) ⇌ H3O+ (aq) + Cl (aq)

In this reaction, HCl donates its one proton to become Cl and H2O accepts one proton to become H3O+. Thus, HCl is a Bronsted acid and H2O is a Bronsted base.

Every acid must form a base on donating its proton and every base must form an acid on accepting a proton.
Equilibrium Class 11 Notes Chemistry 10
Conjugate Acid-Base Pairs: Consider the reaction between an acid and a base
Equilibrium Class 11 Notes Chemistry 11
In this reaction, HCl donates a proton (acts as an acid) and forms Cl ion which has a tendency to accept a proton (can act as a base). Similarly, NH3 accepts a proton and acts as a base but it forms an NH4+ ion which has a tendency to behave as an acid. In other words, an acid donates a proton .and becomes a base and a base accepts a proton and becomes an acid.

The base formed from acid is referred to as the conjugate base of the acid. Similarly’ the acid formed from a base is called the conjugate acid of the base. Thus, in the above example, Cl is the conjugate base of acid HCl arid NH4+ is the conjugate acid of the base NH3.

The pairs of acids and bases are formed from each other by the gain or loss of a proton are called conjugate acid-base pairs.

Thus, each acid-base reaction involves two pairs of conjugate acids and bases. These are labeled as 1 and 2 as shown below:
Equilibrium Class 11 Notes Chemistry 12
It may be noted that the conjugate base of a strong acid is a weak base and the conjugate base of a weak acid is a strong base. Strong acids like HCl, HNO3 have weak bases like Cl and NO3 and vice versa.

Lewis’s concept of Acids and Bases: G.N. Lewis (1923) proposed a more general and broader concept of acids and bases. According to this concept, an acid is a substance (molecule or ion) that can accept a pair of electrons while a base is a substance (molecule or ion) that can donate a pair of electrons. Some examples of Lewis acids and bases are

Lewis bases

  1. Neutral species having at least one lone pair of electrons, e.g. NH3, -NH2, ROH
  2. Negatively charged ions e.g., CN, Cl, OH.

Lewis acids

  1. Molecules in which the central atom has incomplete octet e.g., AlCl3, BF3, FeCl3, etc,
  2. Simple cations act as Lewis acids, e.g., Ag+, H+, etc.
  3. Molecules having empty d-orbitals in the central atom, e.g., SiF4, SnCl4, PF5.
  4. Molecules in which atoms of dissimilar electronegativities are joined by multiple bonds, e.g., CO2, SO2, etc.

The acid-base reaction may be written as:
Equilibrium Class 11 Notes Chemistry 13
Equilibrium Class 11 Notes Chemistry 14
Problem. Classify the following species into Lewis acids and Lewis bases and show how these act as such:
Equilibrium Class 11 Notes Chemistry 15
Answer:
This ion acts as a Lewis base as it can donate any one of its four electron pairs.

(b) OH
Answer:
OH is a lewis base as it can donate an electron lone pair.

(c) H+
Answer:
H+ A proton is a lewis acid as it can accept a lone pair of electrons from bases like OH and F ions.

(d) BCl3
Answer:
BCl3 acts as a lewis acid as it can accept a lone pair from species like ammonia or amine molecules.

Ionization of water-ionic product of water
Water is a weak electrolyte and it undergoes self ionization as
H2O + H2O ⇌ H3O+ + OH

Applying the law of chemical equilibrium
K = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{H}_{3} \mathrm{O}^{+}\right]\left[\mathrm{OH}^{-}\right]}{\left[\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}\right]^{2}}\)

Since the dissociation of water takes place to a small extent, the concentration of the undissociated water is nearly constant. Therefore,
K = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{H}_{3} \mathrm{O}^{+}\right]\left[\mathrm{OH}^{-}\right]}{\text {Constant }}\)
K × Constant = [H3O+][OH]
or
Kw = [H3O+][OH]

where is a constant and is known as ionic product of water. Its value is constant at a particular temperature. At 298 K, the value of Kw is 1.008 × 10-14mol2 L-2. That is,
Kw = [H3O+][OH-] = 1.008 × 10-14 at 298 K

It is quite evident that the concentrations of H3O+ and OH- ions are equal in pure water so that
[H3O+] = [OH] = 1.0 × 10-7 mol L-1

It may be remembered that
if [H3O+] = [OH]: the solution is neutral
[H3O+] > [OH]: the solution is acidic
[H3O+] < [OH]: the solution is basic.

In a basic or acidic solution, the concentration of H3O+ or OH- may be calculated as
[H3O+] = \(\frac{\mathrm{K}_{w}}{\left[\mathrm{OH}^{-}\right]}\)[OH~] = \(\frac{\mathrm{K}_{w}}{\left[\mathrm{H}_{3} \mathrm{O}^{+}\right]}\)

pH scale
The pH of a solution may be defined as the negative logarithm of the H3O+ ion concentration in moles per liter. Mathematically, it may be expressed as
pH = – log [H3O+]
or
log [H3O+]

For neutral solution, pH = – log [1.0 × 10-7] = 7
In a similar way, by substituting different values of [H3O+] in the above relation, it can be seen that

  • For acidic solution pH <7
  • For basic solution pH >7
  • For neutral solution pH = 7

To express the acidic or basic character of a solution, a scale has been proposed from pH 1 to 14. This scale is known as the pH scale.

It may be noted that solutions having pH between 0 to 2 are strongly acidic, those with pH between 2 to 4 are moderately acidic while the others having pH between 4 to 7 are weakly acidic. Similarly, the solutions having pH values between 7 to 10 are weakly basic, those having pH 10 to 12 are moderately basic whereas the others which haying a pH range between 12 to 14 are strongly basic.

pOH scale Like pH, pOH may be defined as
pOH = – log [OH]

At 298K pH + pOH = pK° = – logKw = – log 10-14
∴ pH + pOH= 14

At 298 K, Ionic product of water =1.0 × 10-14
[precisely = 1.08 × 10-14 mol2 L-2]

The value of Kw goes on increasing as the temperature increases.

It is because with the increase in temperature, the degree of ionization of water into H+ ions and OH ions increases.
But since pH = – log [H+]
∴ the pH of water decreases with an increase in temperature.

The ionization of Bases
The bases in their aqueous solutions furnish OH (hydroxyl) ions.
For example
NaOH + H2O (excess) → Na+ (aq) + OH (aq)
NH3 + H2O (excess) ⇌ NH4OH (aq) ⇌ NH4+ (aq) + OH (aq)

Strong bases like NaOH and KOH are completely dissociated into their constituent ions in dilute solutions.

Weak Bases like NH4OH, AgOH are ionized in an aqueous solution to a small extent only. The ionization of a base is characterized by an equilibrium constant called base dissociation constant (Kb), for example for a base like MOH
MOH + H2O (excess) ⇌ M+ (aq) + OH (aq)
Kb = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{M}^{+}(\mathrm{aq})\right] \times\left[\mathrm{OH}^{-}(\mathrm{aq})\right]}{[\mathrm{M}(\mathrm{OH})]}\)

If n moles of a base is dissolved in V liters of the solution and a is the degree of dissociation of the base, then the amounts of various species at equilibrium present are

  • No. of moles of MOH = n(1 – α)
  • No. of moles of OH = nα
  • No. of moles of M+ = nα

The corresponding concentrations in moles per litre are
[MOH] = n(1 – α)/V mol L-1 = C(1 – α) mol L-1
[OH] = nα/V mol L-1 = Cα mol L-1
[M+] = na/V mol-1 = Cα mol L-1.

Thus, the ionisation constant of the base is given by
Kb = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{M}^{+}\right]\left[\mathrm{OH}^{-}\right]}{[\mathrm{MOH}]}=\frac{\mathrm{C} \alpha \cdot \mathrm{C} \alpha}{\mathrm{C}(1-\alpha)}=\frac{\mathrm{C} \alpha^{2}}{(1-\alpha)}\)

where C is the molar concentration of the base in solution.
If α is small (i.e., the base is fairly weak) then a can be ignored in comparison to 1. Then
Kb = Cα2
or
α = \(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{K}_{b}}{\mathrm{C}}}=\sqrt{\mathrm{K}_{b} \mathrm{~V}}\) ……..(1)

where V is the volume of the solution in liters containing one mole of the base MOH. From equation (1), it is apparent that the degree of ionization of the base increases with dilution.

The hydroxide ion concentration in the solution is given by,
[OH] = Cα = C × \(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{K}_{b}}{\mathrm{C}}}=\sqrt{\mathrm{K}_{b} \mathrm{C}}\).

→ Di and Polybasic Acids and Di-and Polyacidic Bases: Some of the acids like oxalic acid, sulphuric acid, and phosphoric acids have more than one ionizable proton per molecule of the acid. Such acids are known as polybasic or polyprotic acids. The ionization reactions for example of a dibasic acid H2X, are represented by the equations:
H2X (aq) ⇌ H+ (aq) + HX (aq)
HX(aq) ⇌ H+(aq) + X2(aq)

And the corresponding equilibrium constants are given below:
Ka1 = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{H}^{+}\right]\left[\mathrm{HX}^{-}\right]}{\left[\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{X}\right]}\) and
Ka2 = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{H}^{+}\right]\left[\mathrm{X}^{2-}\right]}{\left[\mathrm{HX}^{-}\right]}\)

Here Ka1 and Ka2 are called the first and second ionization constants respectively of the acid H2X. Similarly for tribasic acid like H3PO4 we have three ionization constants.

Similarly, expressions can be written for di and poly acidic bases

Table: The ionization constants of some common polyprotic acids (298 K)
Equilibrium Class 11 Notes Chemistry 16
→ Common ion effect in the ionization of Acids and Bases: The products of ionization of acid are hydrogen ions and the corresponding anion. If any one of the products is added to the acid solution then the acid is ionized to a lesser extent in agreement with Le Chatelier’s principle. Let us consider the example of acetic acid whose dissociation may be represented by its dissociation equilibria.
HAc (aq) ⇌ H+ (aq) + Ac (Aq) .
Ka = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{H}^{+}\right]\left[\mathrm{A} c^{-}\right]}{[\mathrm{HAc}]}\)

If hydrogen ion is provided from any other source, it will combine with the acetate ion and reduce the degree of ionization of acetic acid. Similar will be the effect when the anion is added to the equilibrium mixture from an external source.

Hydrolysis of salts and the pH of their solutions: Salt hydrolysis describes the interaction of water and the cation/anion or both of a salt. The pH of the solution gets affected by this interaction. The cations (e.g., Na+, Rb+, Ca2+, Ba2+, etc.) of the strong Bases and, Anions (e.e. Cl, Br, I, NO3 etc.) of strong acids do not hydrolyze and therefore the solutions of salts formed by strong acids and bases are neutral i.e., their pH is 7. On the other hand, the solutions of salts formed from strong bases and weak acids are alkaline i.e., their pH is greater than 7. While the solutions of strong acids and weak bases are acidic i.e., their pH is less than 7.

→ The salts of strong bases and weak acids: Consider the solution of salts like MX formed by a strong base MOH and a weak acid HX. The salt is a strong electrolyte and is completely dissociated into M+ and X ions.
MX (s) + H2O (l) → M+ (aq) + X (aq)

If the concentration of the salt is ‘C, then the concentration of M+ and X is also C. M+ is the cation of a strong base and therefore it remains as such but the anion X reacts with a water molecule to give unionized acid. This process is known as hydrolysis.
X (aq) + H2O (l) ⇌ HX (aq) + OH (aq)

If ‘h’ is the degree of hydrolysis indicating the extent to which the anion is hydrolyzed and C is the concentration of MX or X, and further assuming that the concentration of water remains constant, the equilibrium constant for the reaction called the hydrolysis constant, Kh is given by the equation
Kh = \(\frac{[\mathrm{HX}]\left[\mathrm{OH}^{-}\right]}{\left[\mathrm{X}^{-}\right]}\)

Multiplying the numerator and the denominator of the right-hand side of the above equation by [H+], we obtain
Kh = \(\frac{[\mathrm{HX}]\left[\mathrm{OH}^{-}\right]\left[\mathrm{H}^{+}\right]}{\left[\mathrm{X}^{-}\right]\left[\mathrm{H}^{+}\right]}=\frac{\mathrm{K}_{w}}{\mathrm{~K}_{a}}\)

If ‘C’ is the concentration of the salt in the solution and ‘h’ is the degree of hydrolysis, then after the equilibrium is established the concentration of various species in the solutions are given by the equations:
[X] = C(1 -h) and [OH] = [HX] = Ch

We then have the quadratic equation
Equilibrium Class 11 Notes Chemistry 17
→ The salts of strong acids and weak bases: The salt MX formed by a strong acid HX and a weak base MOH when dissolved in water dissociated into cations M+ and anions X. The cation undergoes hydrolysis represented by the reaction
Equilibrium Class 11 Notes Chemistry 18
If ‘C is the concentration of the salt in the solution, h is its degree of hydrolysis, then equilibrium concentrations of various species are given by the equation.
[MOH] = [H+] = Ch and [M+] = C(1 – h)
Kh = Hydrolysis constt. = \(\frac{\mathrm{K}_{w}}{\mathrm{~K}_{b}}\)
= \(\frac{(C h)^{2}}{C(1-h)}=\frac{C h^{2}}{1-h}\)

If h = degree of hydrolysis is small
1 -h ≈ 1
∴ Kh = Ch2
Equilibrium Class 11 Notes Chemistry 19
pH = \(\frac{1}{2}\)[pKw – pKb – log C]

At 298 K, the equation becomes
pH = 7 – \(\frac{1}{2}\)[pKb + logC]

→ The salts of weak bases and weak acids: Consider a salt MX formed by the weak base MOH and the weak acid MX. The salt in the aqueous solution is completely dissociated into the ions and both of these now ionize in water by the reaction
M+ (aq) + X (aq) + H2O (l) ⇌ MOH (aq) + HX (aq)

Assuming that in dilute solution the concentration of water remains constant, the hydrolysis constant is given by the equation:
Kh = \(\frac{[\mathrm{MOH}][\mathrm{HX}]}{\left[\mathrm{M}^{+}\right]\left[\mathrm{X}^{-}\right]}\)

Multiplying the right hand side both in the numerator and the denominator by [H+][OH_], we get
Kh = \(\frac{[\mathrm{MOH}][\mathrm{HX}]}{\left[\mathrm{M}^{+}\right]\left[\mathrm{OH}^{-}\right]} \cdot \frac{[\mathrm{HX}]}{\left[\mathrm{H}^{+}\right]\left[\mathrm{X}^{-}\right]}\) × [H+][OH-]

= \(\frac{K_{a}}{\left(K_{b} \times K_{a}\right)}\)

If ‘C’ the concentration of the salt and ‘h’ the degree of hydrolysis, then at equilibrium, the concentrations of various species are given by the relations
[MOH] = [HX] = Ch and [M+] = [X-] = C(1 – h) and
we have now
Kb = \(\frac{(\mathrm{C}) n^{2}}{\left[\mathrm{C}(1-h)^{2}\right]}=\frac{h}{(1-h)^{2}}\)
or
\(\frac{h}{1-h}\) = (Kh)1/2

The concentration of the hydrogen ion can be calculated using the equation for the ionization constant of the acid, HX
Ka = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{H}^{+}\right]\left[\mathrm{X}^{-}\right]}{[\mathrm{HX}]}\)
Equilibrium Class 11 Notes Chemistry 20
If Kh is small then ‘h’ is also small and we have h = K1/2 and (1 – h) = 1 and we have
pH = pKa – log (h) = pKa – [(log (Kb)1/2]
= \(\frac{1}{2}\)[pKw + pKa – pKb]
and at 298 K, we have pH = 7 + \(\frac{1}{2}\)(pKa – pKb).

→ Problem: The pKa of acetic acid and pKb of ammonium hydroxide are respectively 4.76 and 4.75. Calculate the pH of ammonium acetate solution.
Answer:
pH = 7 + \(\frac{1}{2}\)(pKa – pKb) = 7 + \(\frac{1}{2}\)(7.46 – 4.75)
= 7 + \(\frac{1}{2}\)(0.01) = 7.005.

→ Buffer Solutions: Many-body fluids e.g. blood and urine have definite pH and any deviation in their pH indicates malfunctioning of the body. The control of pH is very important in chemical and biochemical processes.

The solutions which resist change in their pH on dilution or on the addition of a small amount of acid or base are called buffer solutions.

Solubility Equilibria of Sparingly Soluble Salts The solubility of a substance depends on a number of factors. They are the lattice enthalpy of the salt and the solvation enthalpy of the ion. For salt to dissolve in a solvent the strong forces of attraction between the ions (lattice energy) must be overcome by the ion solvent its solvation enthalpy must be greater than its lattice enthalpy. On the basis of their solubility, the salts can be classified into 3 categories.

Category I: Soluble Solubility > 0.1 M
Category II: Slightly soluble 0.01 < solubility < 0.1 M
Category III: Sparingly soluble Solubility < 0.01 M.

Solubility Product Constant
Whenever a sparingly soluble ionic substance like AgCl, AgBr, Agl, BaSO4, PbCrO4, etc. is placed in a polar solvent like water, it dissolves to a very limited extent to produce ions in the solution. After a little while, an equilibrium between the solid phase and the ions in the solution is established. For example, for an ionic substance AB, the equilibrium is
Equilibrium Class 11 Notes Chemistry 21
Since the concentration of the solid substances, AB at any temperature is constant, hence the above equilibrium (between ions and solid substance) can be described by a new constant K.
Ksp = [A+(aq)][B(aq)]

Ksp is called the solubility product constant or simply as solubility product of the salt concerned

Ksp for a salt of the type AB2: For a sparingly soluble ionic salt of type AB2, the dissolution leads to the equilibrium AB2 (S) + H2O (excess) ⇌ [A2+ (aq) + 2B (aq)]
Ksp = [A2+ (aq)][B (aq)]2

→ Ksp for a salt of the type AmBn: For a salt of the type AmBn (s), dissolution leads to dissociation according to the reaction.
AmBn (s) + H2O (excess) ⇌ mAp+ (aq) + nBq- (aq)
where mp+ = nq-

The solubility product constant for the salt AmBn is then expressed as ‘
Ksp = [Ap+ (aq)]m [Bq- (aq)]n

Thus, the solubility product constant (Ksp) of a sparingly soluble salt is defined as the product of the molar concentrations of the ions in its saturated solution each raised to the power equal to the stoichiometric coefficient of the species in the balanced chemical equation.

Common ion effect on the solubility of ionic salts: A shift in the position of the equilibrium involving molecular and ionic forms of an electrolyte, by adding a strong electrolyte having one ion common to it is called common ion effect.

The solubility of a sparingly soluble salt decreases when a highly soluble salt having one ion common to the sparingly soluble salt is added to the solution due to the common ion effect. For example,

The solubility of AgCl (sparingly soluble salt) in water decreases when a small amount of KCl or NaCl is added to the solution. This is because KCl or NaCl dissociate completely in solution to produce more Cl ions.
KCl → K+ + Cl

This increase in the concentration of Cl ion shifts the equilibrium.
AgCl (s) ⇌ Ag+(aq) + Cl(aq)

towards left. This causes more precipitation of AgCl (s). As a result, the solubility of AgCl in the solution decreases.

Table: The solubility product constants, Ksp of some common ionic salts at 298 K
Equilibrium Class 11 Notes Chemistry 22
Equilibrium Class 11 Notes Chemistry 23
→ Equilibrium: It represents the state of a process in which the properties like the temperature, pressure, and concentration of the system do not show any change with the passage of time.

→ Equilibrium Mixture: The mixture of reactants and products in the equilibrium state is called an Equilibrium mixture.

Henry’s Law: The mass of a gas dissolved in a given mass of a solvent at any temperature is directly proportional to the pressure of the gas above the solvent.
i.e., m ∝ p
or
m = kp
where k is a constant of proportionality and is called Henry’s Constant. Its value depends upon the nature of the gas, the nature of the liquid, and the temperature.

Dynamic Equilibrium in Chemical Reactions The chemical reactions reach a state of dynamic equilibrium in which the rates of forward and reverse reactions are equal and there is no net change in composition.

Law of Chemical Equilibrium and Equilibrium Constant At a given temperature, the product of concentrations of the reaction products raised to the respective stoichiometric coefficient in the balanced chemical equation divided by the product of concentrations of the reactants raised to their individual stoichiometric coefficients has a constant value. This constant value is called the Equilibrium Constant.

The equilibrium constant for a general reaction
a A + bB ⇌ cD + dD
is expressed by KC = \(\frac{[\mathrm{C}]^{c} \times[\mathrm{D}]^{d}}{[\mathrm{~A}]^{a} \times[\mathrm{B}]^{b}}\).
where [A], [B], [C], [D] are the equilibrium concentrations of the reactants and products.

If the equilibrium constant for the reaction
H2 (g) + I2 (g) ⇌ 2HI (g) is Kc = [HI]2/[H2][I2]

the equilibrium constant for the reverse reaction
2HI (g) ⇌ H2 (g) + I2 (g) at the same temp, is
Kc = [H2][I2]/[HI]2 = \(\frac{1}{x}=\frac{1}{\mathrm{~K}_{\mathrm{C}}}\)

Thus KC = \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{~K}_{\mathrm{C}}}\)

→ Homogeneous Equilibrium: When the reactants and products of a chemical reaction are in the same state, the system is said to have a homogeneous equilibrium.

→ Heterogeneous Equilibrium: Equilibrium in a system having more than one phase is called heterogeneous equilibrium.

Predicting the direction of the reaction For a general reaction
aA + bB ⇌ cD + dD
Qc = [C]c × [D]d/[A]a × [B]b then

  • If Qc > Kc, the reaction will proceed in the direction of reactants (reverse reaction).
  • If Qc < Kc, the reaction will proceed in the direction of the products (forward reaction).
  • If Qc = Kc, the reaction mixture is already in equilibrium.

That is, no net reaction occurs.
Relationship between Equilibrium Constant K, Reaction Quotient Q, and Gibbs Energy G

  • If ΔG is negative, the reaction is spontaneous and proceeds in the forward direction.
  • If ΔG is positive, the reaction is non-spontaneous.
  • If ΔG = 0, the reaction has achieved equilibrium.

Mathematically,
ΔG – ΔG° + RT InQ.
where G° is standard Gibbs energy.
At equilibrium, when ΔG = 0 and Q = Kc

The above equation becomes
ΔG = ΔG° + RT InK .
ΔG° = – RT InK.
InK = – ΔG°/RT

Taking antilogs
K = e-ΔG /RT

Thus if ΔG° < 0 then – ΔG°/RT is positive and e-ΔG /RT > 1 making K > 1 which implies a spontaneous reaction.

If ΔG° > 0; then – ΔG°/RT is negative and e-ΔG /RT < 1, that is Kc < 1, which implies a non-spontaneous reaction.

For a general reaction
aA + bB ⇌ cD + dD

If pA, pB pC and pD indicate their partial pressures and [A], [B], [C] and [D] indicate their molar concentrations,
Equilibrium Class 11 Notes Chemistry 24
where Δn = (number of moles of gaseous products) – (number of moles of gaseous reactants) in the balanced chemical equation.

→ Le-Chatelier’s Principle: When a system in equilibrium is subjected to a change of temperature, pressure, or concentration the equilibrium shifts in a direction so as to undo the effect of the change applied.

This is applicable to all chemical and physical equilibria.

Arrhenius Concept of Acids and Bases.
→ Acids: are hydrogen-containing substances that dissociate in water to give hydrogen ions H+ (aq).

→ Bases: Bases are substances that produce hydroxyl ions OH (aq) on dissociation in water.

Bronsted-Lowry Concept of Acids and Bases
→ Acid: Acid is a substance that is capable of donating a hydrogen – ion H+. It is a Proton-donor.

→ Base: It is a substance that is capable of accepting a hydrogen ion H+. It is a Proton-acceptor.

Conjugate Acid-base Pair: The acid-base pair which differs only by one proton is called a conjugate acid-base pair.
HCl is an acid whose conjugate base is Cl.
NH3 is a base whose conjugate acid is NH4+.
OH is called the conjugate base of an acid H2O.

If Bronsted acid is a strong acid, then its conjugate base is a weak base and vice-versa,

Lewis Concept of Acids and Bases
→ Acid: It is species which accepts electron pair.

→ Base: It is a species that donates an electron pair.

Thus in the reaction
BF3 + :NH3 ⇌ BF3 :NH3
BF3 is an acid and: NH3 is a base.

The Ionisation Constant of Water and its Ionic Product
Kw which is = [H+] × [OH] is called an Ionic product of water

At 298 K, concentration to H+ = 1.0 × 10-7 M
∴ Concentration of [OH-] is also = 1.0 × 10-7 M
Kw = [H+] × [OH] = [H3O+] × [OH-]
= 1.0 × 10-14M2

The value of Ka is temperature-dependent.
Acidic substance [H3O+] > [OH]
Neutral substance [H3O+] = [OH]
Basic substance [H3P+] < [OH]

The pH scale
PH = – log aH+
where aH+ is hydrogen ion activity

Hence pH of pure water = – log [10-7] = 7.
Acidic solution has pH < 7.
Basic solution has pH > 7
Pure water or Neutral solution has pH = 7
Kw = [H3O+] × [OH] – 10-14
– log Kw = – log {[H3O+] × OH]} = – log 10-14
– log Kw = – log [H3O+] – log [OH] = – log 10-14
or
pKw = pH + pOH = 14

→ pH meter: It is a device that measures the pH-dependent electrical potential of the test solution within 0.001 precission

Ionization constants of weak acids
For a weak acid HX

HX (aq) + H2O (I) ⇌ H3O+ (aq) + X (aq)
Ka = [H3O+][X]/[HX]
where Ka is called the dissociation or ionization constant of acid HX.

At a given temperature, the value of Ka is a measure of the strength of the acid HX. Ka is a dimensionless quantity.
Ionization of weak bases:
For a weak base MOH
MOH (aq) ⇌ M+ (aq) + OH(aq)
Kb = [M+] × [OH]/[MOH] is called base ionisation constant.

The value of Kb is a measure of the strength of a base.
Ka + Kb = Kw for a conjugate acid-base pair
or
pKa + pKb = pKw = 14 at 298 K

Note 1. For a polybasic acid, if Ka1, Ka2… are successive dissociation constants, then
Ka1 > Ka2 >Ka3
Equilibrium Class 11 Notes Chemistry 25
Similarly, H2 S is a stronger acid than H2O.

Note 3. In HA, H-A bond polarity becomes the deciding factor for determining the acid strength. As the electronegativity of A increases, the strength of the acid also increases.
Equilibrium Class 11 Notes Chemistry 26
→ Common-Ion Effect: The suppression of the degree of dissociation of a weak acid or a weak base on the addition of a common ion is called Common-Ion Effect.

Thus the degree of dissociation of a weak base NH4OH is suppressed on the addition of common ion NH4+ by adding NH4Cl which is a strong base.

Hydrolysis of Salts

  1. Salts of strong acids and strong bases like NaCl, KCl, NaNO3 KNO3/ K2SO4, Na2SO4 do not undergo hydrolysis. Their solutions in water are neutral.
  2. Salts of strong acids and weak bases like NH4Cl, CuSO4 yield acidic solutions in water.
  3. Salts of weak acids and strong bases on hydrolysis like CH3COONa, Na2CO3 yield basic solutions in water.
  4. Salts of weak acids and weak bases undergo hydrolysis.
    e.g. CH3COONH4. Their acidic or basic nature depends upon the comparative strength of the acid/base.

Buffer Solutions: The solution which resists a change in pH value on dilution or with the addition of small amounts of acid or alkali is called Buffer solutions.

States of Matter Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry Chapter 5

Here we are providing Class 11 chemistry Important Extra Questions and Answers Chapter 5 States of Matter. Chemistry Class 11 Important Questions are the best resource for students which helps in Class 11 board exams.

Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 5 Important Extra Questions States of Matter

States of Matter Important Extra Questions Very Short Answer Type

Question 1.
What is the pressure of a gas? What is its S.I. unit?
Answer:
The force exerted by the gas molecules per unit area on the walls of the container is equal to its pressure SI. unit of pressure is the pascal (Pa).
1 Pa = Nm2- =1 kg m-1s-2.

Question 2.
What does the temperature of gas represent?
Answer:
The temperature of the gas represents the average kinetic energy of the gas molecules as we know K.E. ∝ \(\sqrt{T}\).

Question 3.
Why is it not possible to cool gas to o K?
Answer:
This is because all gases condense to liquids or solids before this temperature is reached.

Question 4.
What property of molecules of real gases is indicated by van der Waal’s constant ‘a’?
Answer:
Intermolecular attraction.

Question 5.
What do you understand by standard temperature?
Answer:
The standard temperature is 0°C or 273 K.

Question 6.
What is the effect of temperature on the vapour pressure of a liquid?
Answer:
Vapour pressure increases with rising in temperature.

Question 7.
What is an ideal gas equation?
Answer:
For given ideal gas PV = nRT
where P = gas pressure;
V = volume,
R = gas constant
T = Temp. (Kelvin scale);
n – no. of moles of gas.

Combined Gas Law Calculator … Combined gas law is the combination of Charles’s law, Boyle’s law, and Gay-Lussac’s law.

Question 8.
Which state of matter has a definite volume, but no definite shape?
Answer:
Liquid.

Question 9.
What is the value of the gas constant in S.I. units?
Answer:
8.314 JK-1 mol-1.

Question 10.
What are the S.I. units of surface tension?
Answer:
Nm-1

Question 11.
What is the compressibility factor?
Answer:
Z = \(\frac{PV}{nRT}\).

Question 12.
What is the equation of state for real gases?
Answer:
van der Waal’s equation(P + \(\frac{a}{\mathrm{~V}^{2}}\))(v – b) = RT for 1 mole.

Question 13.
How is the pressure of a gas related to its density at a particular temperature?
Answer:
d = \(\frac{MP}{RT}\)

Question 14.
How is the partial pressure of a gas in a mixture related to the total pressure of the gaseous mixture?
Answer:
The partial pressure of a gas = Mole fraction of that gas × total pressure.

Question 15.
What is the relationship between average kinetic energy , and the temperature of a gas?
Answer:
K.E. = \(\frac{3}{2}\)kT
where k is Boltzmann constant = \(\frac{\mathrm{R}}{\mathrm{N}_{0}}\).

Question 16.
What is the significance of van der Waal’s constant ‘a’ and ‘b’?
Answer:
‘a’ is a measure of the magnitude of the intermolecular forces of attraction while ‘b’ is a measure of the effective size of the as molecules.

Question 17.
Arrange the solid, liquid and gas in order of energy-giving reasons.
Answer:
Solids < liquid < gas. This is because a solid absorbs energy to change into a liquid which further absorbs energy to change into a gas.

Question 18.
What is the effect of pressure on the boiling point of a liquid?
Answer:
The boiling point increases as the prevailing pressure increases.

Question 19.
Why are vegetables cooked with difficulty at a hill station?
Answer:
The atmospheric pressure decreases as we go up. Therefore at the hills due to the lowering of atmospheric pressure, boiling points lowered.

Question 20.
The size of the weather balloon keeps on becoming larger as it rises to high altitude. Explain why?
Answer:
At higher altitudes, the external pressure on the balloon decreases and therefore, its size increases.

Question 21.
How is the pressure of a given sample of a gas related to the temperature at a constant volume?
Answer:
P ∝ T, i.e., Pressure varies as absolute temperature.

Question 22.
How is the pressure of a gas related to the number of molecules of a gas at constant volume and temperature?
Answer:
P ∝ N; N = No. of molecules of a gas.

Question 23.
What type of graph do we get when we plot a graph PV against P? What is shown by this graph?
Answer:
It is a straight line parallel to the r-axis. It shows that PV is constant at different pressures. It shows Boyle’s Law.

Question 24.
At what temperature will oxygen molecules have the same kinetic energy as ozone molecules at 30°C?
Answer:
AT 30°C. Kinetic energy depends only on the absolute temperature and not on the identity of the gas.

Question 25.
At a particular temperature why vapours pressure of acetone is less than that of ether?
Answer:
This is because intermolecular forces in acetone are more than those present in ether.

Question 26.
Out of NH3 and N2 which will have
(i) a larger value of V and
Answer:
NH3 will have a large value of ‘a’ because of hydrogen bonding.

(ii) larger value of ‘b’?
Answer:
N2 should have a large value of ‘b’ because of its larger molecular size.

Question 27.
Why are the gases helium and hydrogen not liquefied at room temperature by applying very high pressure?
Answer:
Because their critical temperature is lower than room temperature. Gases cannot be liquefied above the critical temperature by applying even very high pressure.

Question 28.
What will boil at a higher temperature at sea level or at the top of mountains?
Answer:
Water will boil at a higher temperature at sea level.

Question 29.
Under what conditions do real gases tend to show ideal gas behaviour?
Answer:
When the pressure of the gas is very low and the temperature is high.

Question 30.
Both propane (C3Hg) and carbon dioxide (CO2) diffuse at the same rate under identical conditions of temperature and pressure. Why?
Answer:
Both propane (C3Hg) and carbon dioxide (CO2) have the same molar mass (44 gm).

Question 31.
If the number of moles of a gas is doubled by keeping the temperature and pressure constant, what will happen to the volume?
Answer:
The volume will also double as V ∝ n according to Avogadro’s Law.

Question 32.
What is a Triple point?
Answer:
The temperature at which solid, liquid and vapour; i.e., all the three states of the substance exist together is called the triple point.

Question 33.
Is Dalton’s law of partial pressures valid for a mixture of SO2 and O2?
Answer:
No, the law holds good only for those gases which do not react with each other.

Question 34.
Under what conditions a gas deviates from ideal gas behaviour?
Answer:
It deviates at low temperature and high pressure.

Question 35.
Molecule A is twice as heavy as molecule B. Which of these has higher kinetic energy at any temperature?
Answer:
K.E. of a molecule is directly proportional to temperature and is independent of its mass. So both the molecule A and B at any temperature will have equal kinetic energy.

Question 36.
How will you define pascal?
Answer:
It is defined as the pressure exerted by a force of one newton on an area of one meter2.
Pa = 1 Nm-2.

Question 37.
How will you define London or dispersion forces?
Answer:
The forces of attraction between the induced momentary dipoles are called London or dispersion forces.

Question 38.
What is Absolute Zero?
Answer:
The lowest possible hypothetical temperature of – 273°C at which gas is supposed to have zero volume is called Absolute zero.

Question 39.
What is the nature of the gas constant R?
Answer:
States of Matter Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 1
= work done per degree per mole.

Question 40.
What is the value of R in SI units?
Answer:
R = 8.314 JK-1 mol-1 = 8.314 k Pa dm3 K-1 mol-1

Question 41.
What is meant from Boyle point or Boyle temperature?
Answer:
The temperature at which a real gas behaves like an ideal gas over an appreciable pressure range is called Boyle point or Boyle temperature.

Question 42.
How will you define viscosity?
Answer:
The internal resistance to the flow of a fluid is called its viscosity.

Question 43.
What is the effect of temperature on the viscosity of a liquid?
Answer:
The viscosity of a liquid decreases with an increase in temperature.

Question 44.
How will you convert pressure in atmospheres into SI units?
Answer:
1 atm = 1,01,325 Pa or Nm-2 or 1 bar = 105 Pa.

Question 45.
What do you understand from surface tension?
Answer:
The surface tension of a liquid is defined as the force acting at right angles to the surface along a one-centimetre length of the. liquid.

Question 46.
What is the effect of the increase in temperature on the surface tension of a liquid?
Answer:
Surface tension decreases in increasing the temperature.

Question 47.
What is the difference between normal boiling point and standard boiling point?
Answer:
When the external pressure is equal to one atmospheric pressure the boiling point is referred to as a normal boiling point, when it is one bar, the boiling point is called its standard boiling point.

Question 48.
What is the difference between vapour and gas?
Answer:
When gas is below its critical temperature, it is called vapour.

Question 49.
What happens if a liquid is heated to the critical temperature of its vapours?
Answer:
The meniscus between the liquid and the vapour disappears, the surface tension of the liquid becomes zero.

Question 50.
Why falling liquid drops are spherical?
Answer:
The surface area of a sphere is minimum. In order to have minimum surface area drops of the liquid become spherical.

States of Matter Important Extra Questions Short Answer Type

Question 1.
Ammonia and Sulphur dioxide gases are prepared in two comers of a laboratory. Which gas will be detected first by a student working in the middle of the laboratory and why?
Answer:
Molecular mass of NH3 = 17 Molecular mass of SO2 = 64
NH3 is a lighter gas and diffuses at a faster speed than SO2
∴ NH3 gas will be detected first.
[∵ Acc. to Graham’s law of diffusion \(\frac{r_{1}}{r_{2}}=\sqrt{\frac{d_{2}}{d_{1}}}\)

Question 2.
What is the effect of hydrogen bonding on the viscosity of a liquid?
Answer:
Hydrogen bonding leads to an increase in the effective size of the moving unit in the liquid. Due to an increase in the size and mass of the molecule, there is greater interval resistance of the flow of the liquid. As a result, the viscosity of the liquid rises.

Question 3.
Which are the two faulty assumptions in the kinetic theory of gases.
Answer:

  1. There is no force of attraction between the molecules of the gas.
  2. The volume of the molecules of the gas is negligibly small as compared to the total space (volume) occupied by the gas.

Question 4.
What is the relationship between the density and molar mass of a gaseous substance? Derive it.
Answer:
Ideal gas equation is PV = nRT
or \(\frac{n}{V}=\frac{p}{R T}\)
Replacing n by \(\frac{m}{M}\), we get
States of Matter Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 2

Question 5.
What is meant by the term: Non-ideal or real gas?
Answer:
The gas which does not obey the Cas law:
Boyle’s law, Charles’ law, Avogadro^ law at all temperatures and pressures is a called-non-ideal or real gas. Most of the real gases show ideal behaviour at low pressure and high temperature.

Question 6.
Derive the ideal gas equation PV = nRT.
Answer:
According to Boyle’s law V ∝ \(\frac{1}{P}\) if n and T are constant.
According to Charles’ law V ∝ T at constant P.and n
According to Avogadro’s law V ∝ n at constant T and P
Combining the three laws
In
V ∝ \(\frac{Tn}{P}\)
or
PV ∝ nT
or
PV = nRT where R is a constant of proportionality called universal gas constant.

Question 7.
Why liquids have a definite volume, but no definite shape?
Answer:
It is due to the fact that in liquids intermolecular forces are strong enough to hold the molecules together, but these are strong enough to hold the molecules together, but these forces are not strong enough to fix them into definite or concrete positions as in solids. Hence they possess fluidity but no definite shape.

Question 8.
How do the real gases deviate from ideality above and below the Boyle point?
Answer:
Above their Boyle point, real gases show positive deviations from ideality and the values of Z are greater than one. The forces of attraction between the molecules are very feeble. Below the Boyle point, real gases first show a decrease, in Z value with increasing pressure, the value Of Z increases continuously.

Question 9.
Write down the van der Waals, equation for n moles of a real gas. What do the constants ‘a’ and ‘b’ stand for?
Answer:
(P + \(\frac{a n^{2}}{V^{2}}\)) (V – nb) = nRT
where p, Vindicate gas pressure and its volume. T is the Kelvin temperature of the gas. R is gas constant. Value of ‘a’ is a measure of the magnitude of intermolecular attractive forces within the molecule and is independent of temperature and pressure, ‘rib’ is approximately the total volume occupied by the molecules themselves. ‘a’ and ‘b’ are called van der Waals constants and their value depends upon the nature of the gas.

Question 10.
How is compressibility factor Z related to the real and ideal volume of the gas?
Answer:
Z = \(\frac{P \mathrm{~V}_{\text {real }}}{n \mathrm{RT}}\) …(1)

If the gas shows ideal behaviour, then
Videal = \(\frac{nRT}{P}\) ….(2)

On putting the titis value of nRT in equation (1), we get
Z = \(\frac{\mathrm{V}_{\text {real }}}{\mathrm{V}_{\text {ideal }}}\)

Thus the compressibility factor Z is the ratio of the actual molar volume of a gas to the molar volume of it. if it were an ideal gas at that temperature and pressure.

Question 11.
What do the critical temperature, critical pressure, and critical volume for a gas stand for?
Answer:
The critical temperature is the temperature above which a gas cannot be liquified however large may be the pressure applied on it. The pressure sufficient to liquiíy a gas at its critical temperature is called its critical pressure. The volume of the gas at its crìtical temperature is called its critical volume’.

Question 12.
What do the absolute zero and absolute scale of temperature stand for?
Answer:
The lowest possible hypothetical temperature of – 273°C at which gas is supposed to have zero volume is called Absolute! zero.

Lord Kelvin suggested a new scale of temperature starting with – 273°C and it’s zero. This scale of temperature is called the absolute scale of temperature.

Absolute or Kelvin temperature is given by T, where
T = t°C + 273
t°C stands for the centigrade scale of temperature.

Question 13.
Give one application of Dalton’s law of partial pressures.
Answer:
One application of Dalton’s law of partial pressures is in determining the/pressure of dry gas. Gases are generally collected over water and, so they contain water vapours. The pressure exerted by the water Vapours at-a particular temperature is called the Aqueous Tension. By subtracting the aqueous tension from the ‘ vapour pressure of the moist gas, the pressure of the dry gas can be calculated.
Pdry gas= Pmoist gas – Aqueous Tension (at t°C).

Question 14.
How will you calculate the partial pressure of gas using Dalton’s Law of partial pressures?
Answer:
In a mixture of non-reacting gases A, B, C etc., if each gas is considered to be an ideal gas, then
PA = nA \(\frac{RT}{V}\)
PB = nB \(\frac{RT}{V}\)
PC = nC \(\frac{RT}{V}\)
where nA, nB nC stand for their respective moles in the same vessel .
[V = constant, keeping T constant]
Then according to Dalton’s law ‘
States of Matter Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 3
Thus, particle pressure of a. gas – Mole fraction of A × Total pressure.

Question 15.
Is there any effect of the nature of a liquid and temperature on the surface tension of a liquid?
Answer:

  1. Effect of nature of the liquid: Surface tension is a property that arises due to the intermolecular forces of attraction among the molecules of the liquid.
  2. The surface tension of the liquids generally decreases with an increase in temperature and becomes zero at the critical temperature.

Question 16.
Leaving electrostatic forces that exist between oppositely charged ions, which other intermolecular attractive forces exist between atoms or ions. Mention them.
Answer:

  1. van der Waals forces
  2. London Forces or Dispersion Forces
  3. Dipole-dipole forces
  4. Dipole-induced dipole forces
  5. Hydrogen bond.

Question 17.
What is the relationship between intermolecular forces and thermal interactions?
Answer:
Intermolecular forces tend to keep the molecules together but the thermal energy of the molecules tends to keep them apart. Three states of matter are the result of a balance between intermolecular forces and the thermal energy of the molecules.
Gas → Liquid → Solid
intermolecular forces increases →
Gas ← Liquid ← Solid
increase in Thermal energy ←

Question 18.
What are the main characteristics associated with gases?
Answer:

  1. Gases are highly compressible.
  2. Gases exert pressure equally in all directions.
  3. Gases have a much lower density than solids or liquids.
  4. Gases do not have definite shape and volume.
  5. Gases intermix freely and completely in all proportions.

Question 19.
What do you understand by the term? Isotherms and Isobars?
Answer:
Isotherms are the curves plotted by varying pressure against volume keeping temperature constant.

Each line obtained by plotting volume against temperature keeping, pressure constant is called an Isobar.

Question 20.
What are the forces which are responsible for the viscosity of a liquid? Why is glycerol more viscous than water?
Answer:
The forces responsible for the viscosity of the liquids are

  • Hydrogen bonding
  • van der Waals torches.

Glycerol possesses greater viscosity than water because glycerol has extensive hydrogen bonding in its molecules due to the pressure of three-Oil groups in it as compared to the hydrogen bonding in water molecules.

States of Matter Important Extra Questions Long Answer Type

Question 1.
Derive the Ideal gas equation PV = nRT.
Answer:
Let a certain mass of a gas at pressure P1 and temperature
T1 occupy a volume V1. On changing the pressure and temperature respectively to P2 and T2, let the volume of the gas change to V2.
(i) Let us first change the pressure P1 to P2 at constant temperature T1. Then, according to Boyle’s law, volume V is given by,
P2V = P1V1
or
V = \(\frac{P_{1} V_{1}}{P_{2}}\) …(1)

(ii) Now keeping the pressure constant at P2, heat the gas from temperature T1 to T2, the volume changes from V to V2.
By Charle’s Law, we must have,
States of Matter Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 4
The numerical value of k depends upon the amount of gas and the units in which P and V are expressed. By Avogadro’s law, for one mole of any gas, the value of \(\frac{PV}{T}\) will be the same and is represented
\(\frac{PV}{T}\) = R
or
PV = RT.
for n moles of an ideal gas
PV = nRT

Question 2.
State the fundamental assumptions of the kinetic theory of gases
Or
What are the postulates of the kinetic theory of gases?
Or
Write a short note on “Microscopic Model of a gas”.
Answer:
To explain the general properties of gases to provide some theoretical explanation for various gas laws (stated on basis of experimental studies), various, scientists Bernoulli, Clausius, Maxwells, Boltzmann and others, gave ‘Kinetic Theory of Gases’ which explains qualitatively as well as quantitatively the various aspects of gas behaviour.

The important postulates of the theory are:

  1. All gases are made up of a very large number of minutes particles called molecules.
  2. The molecules are separated from one another by large distances. The empty spaces among the molecules are so large that the actual volume of the molecules is negligible as compared to the total volume of the gas.
  3. The molecules are in a state of constant rapid motion in all directions. During their motion, they keep on colliding with one another and. also with the walls of the container and, thus, change their directions.
  4. Molecular collisions are perfectly elastic, no loss of energy occurs when the molecules collide with one another or with the walls of the container. However, there may be. redistribution of energy during the collisions.
  5. There are no forces of interaction (attractive or repulsive) between molecules. They move completely independent of one another.
  6. The pressure exerted by the gas is due to the bombardment of its molecules on the walls of the container per unit area.
  7. The average kinetic energy of the gas molecules is directly proportional to the absolute temperature.

Question 3.
Explain the following observations.
(a) Aerated water bottles are kept underwater during summer.
Answer:
Aerated water contains CO2 gas dissolved in an aqueous solution under pressure and the bottles are well stoppered. As in summer temperature increases and we know that the solubility of the gases decreases with increase in temperature and as a result move of gas is expected to be generated may be large in quantity and hence pressure exerted by the gas may be very high and the bottle may explode. So, to decrease the temperature and hence to avoid explosion of the bottles.

(b) Liquid ammonia bottle is cooled before opening the seal.
Answer:
Liquid ammonia bottle contains the gas under very high pressure. If the bottle is opened as such, then the sudden decrease in pressure will lead to a large increase in the volume of the gas. As a result, the gas will come out of the bottle with force. This will lead to the breakage of the bottle. Cooling under tap water will result in a decrease in volume. It reduces the chances of an accident.

(c) The tyre of an automobile is inflated at lesser pressure in summer than in winter.
Answer:
The pressure of the air is directly proportional to the temperature. During summer due to high temperature, the pressure in the tyre will be high as compared to that in water. The tube may burst under high pressure in summer. Therefore, it is advisable to inflate the tyre to lesser pressure in summer than in winter.

(d) The size of the weather balloon becomes larger and larger as it ascends up to higher altitudes.
Answer:
Answered somewhere else in the book.

States of Matter Important Extra Questions Numerical Problems

Question 1.
In a hospital, an oxygen cylinder holds 10 L of oxygen at 200 atm pressure. If a patient breathes in 0.50 ml of oxygen at 1.0 atm with each breath, for how many breaths the cylinder will be sufficient. Assume that all the data is at 37°C.
Answer:
10 L at 200 atm =? L at 1 atm. [Temp, is constant at 37°C]
∴ Boyle’s law P1V1 = P2V2 can be applied
200 × 10 = 1 × V2
or
V2 = 2000 L

Number of breaths = \(\frac{\text { Total volume }}{\text { Volume inhaled per breath }}\)
= \(\frac{2000 \mathrm{~L}}{0.5 \times 10^{-3} \mathrm{~L}}\)
= 4 × 106

Question 2.
Calculate the pressure of 1 × 1022 molecules of oxygen gas when enclosed ¡n a vessel of 5-litre capacity at a temperature of 27°C.
Answer:
Number f moles of O2 = \(\frac{1 \times 10^{22}}{6.02 \times 10^{23}}\)

= 0.166 × 10-1 mol
= 1.66 × 102 mol
The pressure exerted by O2 molecules can be calculated by the equation
PV = nRT [Ideal gas equation]
States of Matter Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 5

Question 3.
When a ship is sailing in the Pacific Ocean where the temperature is 23.4°C, a balloon is filled with 2 L air. What will be the volume of the balloon when the ship reaches the Indian Ocean, where the temperature is 26.1°C.
Answer:
V1 = 2 L
T1 = 23.4 + 273 = 296.4K
T2 = 26.1 + 273 = 299.1 K
From Charle’s Law
States of Matter Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 6

Question 4.
At what temperature centigrade, will the volume of a gas at 0°C double itself, pressure remaining constant?
Answer:
Let the volume of the gas at 0°C = V1 mL
Final Volume = V2 = 2V1 mL [Given]
T1 = OC + 273 = 273 K, T2 =?

Since Pressure remains constant
∴ Charles law can be applied
States of Matter Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 7

Question 5.
A bulb ‘B’ of the unknown volume containing gas at one atmospheric pressure is connected to an evacuated bulb of 0.5-litre capacity through a stop-cock. On opening the stop-cock, the final pressure was found to be 570 mm at the same temperature. ‘What is the volume of bulb ‘B’?
Answer:
Let the volume of the bulb = V1; P, = 1 atm
Evacuated Bulb has volume = 0.5 L;
Total volume of both bulbs after the opening of stop-cock = (V1 + 0.5) L i.e. V2 = (V1 + 0.5):
P2 = 570 mm = \(\frac{570}{760}\) atm

Apply Boyle’s law P1V1 = P2V2
1 × V1 = \(\frac{570}{760}\) × (V1 + 0.5)

On solving the above equation
V1 = 1.5 L
∴ Volume of the unknown bulb ‘B’ = 1.5 L

Question 6.
1 mole of SO2 occupies 1.5 L at 25°C. Calculate the pressure exerted by gas assuming that gas does not obey the ideal gas equation. (Given a = 3.6 atm L2mol-2, b = 0.04 L mol-1) where a, b are van der Waal’s constants.
Answer:
States of Matter Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 8
States of Matter Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 9

Question 7.
A gas occupies a volume of 2.5 L at 9 × 105 Nm-2. Calculate the additional pressure required to decrease the volume of the gas to 1.5 L, keeping the temperature constant.
Answer:
V1 = 2.5 L; P1 = 9 × 105 Nm-2
V2 = 1.5 L; P2 =?

Since temperature is constant, Boyle’s law is applied.
States of Matter Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 10

Question 8.
What volume of air will be expelled from a vessel containing 400 cm3 at 7° C when it is heated to 27° C at the same pressure?
Answer:
As the pressure is constant, Charles law is applied
States of Matter Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 11
428.6 cm3 is the volume after expansion
∴ Volume expelled = (428.6 – 400) cm3 = 28.6 cm3.

Question 9.
A 10.0 L container is filled with a gas to a pressure of 2.0 atm at 0°C. At what temperature will the pressure of the gas inside the container be 2.50 atm.
Answer:
As the volume of the container remains constant, Gay- Lussac’s Law/Amonton’s Law is applicable
\(\frac{P_{1}}{T_{1}}=\frac{P_{2}}{T_{2}}\)
\(\frac{2}{273}=\frac{2.50}{\mathrm{~T}_{2}}\)
T2 = 341 K
or
t2 = (341 – 273)°C = 68°C.

Question 10.
One litre flask containing vapours of methyl alcohol (Mol. mass = 32) at a pressure of 1 atm and 25°C was evacuated till the final pressure was 10-3 mm. How many molecules of methyl alcohol were left in the flask?
Answer:
P1 = 10-3 mm; V1 = 1000 cm3; T1 = 298 K
Converting this volume to volume, at STP, where T2 = 2/3 K and P2 = 760 mm
States of Matter Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 12
Now, 22400 cm3 at STP contains 6.02 × 1023 molecules

∴ 1.205 × 10-3 cm3 at STP contains
= \(\frac{6.02 \times 10^{23}}{22400}\) × 1.205 × 10-3 molecules
= 3.24 × 1016 molecules.

Question 11.
A sealed tube that can withstand a pressure of 3 atm is filled with air at 27°C and 760 mm pressure. Find the temperature above which it will burst?
Answer:
Applying gas equation \(\frac{P_{1}}{T_{1}}=\frac{P_{2}}{T_{2}}\) as volume of the sealed tube remains constant .
\(\frac{1}{300}=\frac{3}{\mathrm{~T}_{2}}\)
T2 = 900 K
or
t2 = 900 – 273 = 627°C.

Question 12.
The temperature at the foot of a mountain is 30°C and pressure is 760 mm. Whereas at the top of the mountain these are 0°C and 710 mm. Compare the densities of the air at the foot and at the top.
Answer:
States of Matter Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 13
∴ the ratio of densities of air at the foot and the top of the mountain = 0.964: 1.

Question 13.
10.0 g of O2 were introduced into an evacuated vessel of 5-litre capacity maintained at 27°C. Calculate the pressure of the gas in the atmosphere in the container.
Answer:
Volume of the gas = V = 5 L;
Wt. of O2 = 10.0 g
Molar mass of O2 = 32.0
∴ No. of moles = \(\frac{10}{32}\)

T = 27 + 273 = 300 K; R = 0.0821 L atm K-1 mol-1
From ideal gas equation,
PV = nRT, we get
P = \(\frac{10}{32}\) × 0.0821 × 300 = 1.54 atm.

Question 14.
8.0 g of methane is placed in a 5 L container at 27°C. Find Boyle constant.
Answer:
Pressure × Volume is called Boyle’s constant
PV = nRT = \(\frac{W}{M}\) RT ,
= \(\frac{8}{16}\) × 0.0821 × 300
= 12.315 L atm

Question 15.
The density of A gas is 3.80 g L-1 at STP. Calculate its density at 27°C and 700 torr pressure
Answer:
d = \(\frac{PM}{RT}\)
For the same gas at two different pressures and temperatures,
States of Matter Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 14
States of Matter Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 15

Question 16.
If the density of a gas at sea level and 0°C is 1.29 kg m-3, what will be its molar mass (Assume that pressure is equal to 1 bar).
Answer:
States of Matter Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 16

Question 17.
A gaseous mixture contains 56 g N2, 44 g CO2 and 16 g CH4 The total pressure of the mixture is 720 mm Hg. What is the partial pressure of CH4?
Answer:
States of Matter Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 17

Question 18.
A 2 L flask contains 1.6 g of methane and 0.5 g of hydrogen at 27°C. Calculate the partial pressure of each gas in the mixture and hence calculate the total pressure.
Answer:
1.6 g CH4 = \(\frac{1.6}{16}\) = 0.1 Mole
16
Partial pressure of CH4 (pCH4) = CH4 × \(\frac{RT}{P}\)
States of Matter Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 18

Question 19.
One mole of S02 gas occupied a volume of 350 mL at 27°C and 50 atm pressure. Calculate the compressibility factor of the gas. Comment on the type of deviation shown by the gas from ideal behaviour.
Answer:
Compressibility factor, Z =
Here n = 1, P = 50 atm, V = 350 × 10-3 L = 0.35 L
R = 0.0821 L atm K-1 mol-1; T = 27 + 273 = 300 K
∴ Z = \(\frac{50 \times 0.35}{1 \times 0.0821 \times 300}\) = 0.711
For an ideal gas Z = 1
As for the given gas Z < 1, it shows a negative deviation, i.e., it is more compressible than expected from ideal behaviour.

Question 20.
A mixture of CO and CO2 is found to have a density of 1.5 g L-1 at 20°C and 740 mm pressure. Calculate the composition of the mixture.
Answer:
1. Calculation of average molecular mass of the mixture
M = \(\frac{d R T}{P}=\frac{1.50 \times 0.0821 \times 293}{\frac{740}{760}}\) = 37.06

2. Calculation of percentage composition
Let mol% of CO in the mixture = x
Then mol% of CO? in the mixture = 100 – x

Average molecular mass
States of Matter Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 19
States of Matter Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 20

Question 21.
A 5-L vessel contains 14 g of nitrogen. When heated to 1800 K, 30% of molecules are dissociated into atoms. Calculate the pressure of the gas at 1800 K.
Answer:
N2 ⇌ 2N

Initial moles = \(\frac{1.4}{28}\) = 0.05
Moles left = 0.05 – \(\frac{30}{100}\) × 0.05 = 2 × 0.015 = 0.03

∴ Total no. of moles = 0.035 + 0.030 = 0.065
i.e. n = 0.065 mol, V = 5 L, T = 1800 K; P =?
P = \(\frac{n \mathrm{RT}}{\mathrm{V}}=\frac{0.065 \times 0.0821 \times 1800}{5}\)
= 1.92 atm.

Question 22.
Calculate the temperature of 2 moles of S02 gas contained in a 5 L vessel at 10 bar pressure. Given that for SO2 gas van der Waal’s constant is a – 6.7 bar L2 mol-2 and b = 0.0564 L mol-1.
Answer:
According to van der Waal’s equation
States of Matter Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 21
States of Matter Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 22

Question 23.
A given mass of a gas occupies 919.0 mL in a dry state at STP. The same mass when collected over water at 15°C and 750 mm pressure occupies on litre volume. Calculate the vapour pressure of water at 15°C.
Answer:
If p is the vapour pressure of water at 15°C, then P2 = 750 – p
From the gas equation \(\frac{P_{1} V_{1}}{T_{1}}=\frac{P_{2} V_{2}}{T_{2}}\), we get
\(\frac{760 \times 919}{273}=\frac{(750-p) \times 1000}{288}\)
or
p = 13.3 mm

∴ Vapour pr. of water = 13.3 mm.

Question 24.
A steel tank containing air at 15 atm pressure at 15°C ¡s provided with a safety valve that will yield at a pressure of 30 atm. To what minimum temperature must the air be heated to below the safety valve?
Answer:
\(\frac{P_{1}}{P_{2}}=\frac{T_{1}}{T_{2}}\)
i.e., \(\frac{15}{30}=\frac{288}{\mathrm{~T}_{2}}\)
or
T2 = 576 K
or
t2°C = 576 – 273 = 303°C

Question 25.
Calculate the pressure exerted by 110 g of CO2 in a vessel of 2 L capacity at 37°C. Given that the van der Waals constants are a = 3.59 L2 atm mol-2 and b = 0.0427 L mol-1. Compare the value with the calculated value if the gas were considered ideal.
Answer:
According to van der Waals equation
States of Matter Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 23
110
Here, n = \(\frac{110}{44}\) = 2.5 moles. Putting the given values, we get
P = \(\frac{2.5 \times 0.0821 \times 310}{(2-2.5 \times 0.0427)}-\frac{3.59 \times 2.5}{2}\)
= 33.61 atm – 5.61 atm = 28.0 atm

If the gas were considered an ideal gas. applying ideal gas equation
PV = nRT
or
P = \(\frac{n \mathrm{RT}}{\mathrm{V}}\)
∴ P = \(\frac{2.5 \times 0.0821 \times 310}{2}\) = 31.8 atm

The s-Block Elements Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry Chapter 10

Here we are providing Class 11 chemistry Important Extra Questions and Answers Chapter 10 The s-Block Elements. Chemistry Class 11 Important Questions are the best resource for students which helps in Class 11 board exams.

Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 10 Important Extra Questions The s-Block Elements

The s-Block Elements Important Extra Questions Very Short Answer Type

Question 1
Which element is found in chlorophyll?
Answer:
Magnesium.

Question 2.
Name the elements (alkali metals) which form superoxide when heated in excess of air.
Answer:
Potassium, rubidium and caesium.

Question 3.
Why is the oxidation state of Na and K always + 1?
Answer:
It is due to their high second ionisation enthalpy and stability of their ions [Na+, K+].

Question 4.
Name the metal which floats on the water without any apparent reaction with water.
Answer:
Lithium floats on the water without any apparent reaction to it.

Lithium Oxide Formula. Lithium oxide also lithia is an inorganic compound.

Question 5.
Why do group 1 elements have the lowest ionisation enthalpy?
Answer:
Because of the largest size in their respective periods, solitary electron present in the valence shell can be removed by supplying a small amount of energy.

Question 6.
Why does the following reaction
C – Cl + MF → C – F + MCI
proceed better with KF than with NaF?
Answer:
Because larger K+ cation stabilises larger anion.

Question 7.
Amongst Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs, Fr which one has the highest and which one has the lowest ionisation enthalpy?
Answer:
Li has the highest and Fr has the lowest ionisation enthalpy.

Question 8.
What is the general electronic configuration of alkali metals in their outermost shells?
Answer:
ns1 where n = 2 to 7.

Question 9.
What is meant by dead burnt plaster?
Answer:
It is anhydrous calcium sulphate (CaS04).

Question 10.
Name three forms of calcium carbonate.
Answer:
Limestone, chalk, marble.

Question 11.
Which member of the alkaline earth metals family has
(i) least reactivity
Answer:
Be

(ii) lowest density
Answer:
Ca

(iii) highest boiling point
Answer:
Be

(iv) maximum reduction potential?
Answer:
Be.

Question 12.
Why does lithium show anomalous behaviour?
Answer:
Due to its small size and high charge/size ratio.

Question 13.
Out of LiOH, NaOH, KOH which is the strongest base?
Answer:
KOH.

Question 14.
Write the balanced equations for the reaction between
(a) Na2O2 and water
Answer:
2Na2O2 + 2H2O → 4NaOH + O2

(b) KO2 and water
Answer:
2KO2 + 2H2O → 2KOH + H2O + O2

(c) Na2O and CO2.
Answer:
Na2O4 + CO2 → Na2CO3

Question 15.
Arrange the following in order of increasing covalent character MCI, MBr. MF, MI (where M = alkali metal]
Answer:
MF < MCI < MBr < Ml.
With the increasing size of anion, covalent character increases

Question 16.
Name an element that is invariably bivalent and whose oxide is soluble in excess of NaOH and its dipositive ion has a noble gas core.
Answer:
The element is beryllium (Be) which forms a divalent ion and has a noble gas core [He] 2s2
Be2+ = 1 s2
BeO + 2NaOH → Na2BeO2 + H2O

Question 17.
Arrange the following in the increasing order of solubility in water:
MgCl2, CaCl2, SrCl2, BaCl2.
Answer:
BaCl2 < SrCl2 < CaCl2 < MgCl2.

Question 18.
State the reason for the high solubility of beryllium chloride in organic solvents.
Answer:
Beryllium chloride is a covalent compound.

Question 19.
Which alkali carbonate decomposes on heating to liberate CO2?
Answer:
Lithium carbonate [Li2CO3]
The s-Block Elements Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 1
Question 20.
Why is the solution of an alkali metal in ammonia blue?
Answer:
Due to the presence of ammoniated electrons.

Question 21.
Beryllium oxide has a high melting point. Why?
Answer:
Due to its polymeric nature.

Question 22.
Mention the chief reasons for the resemblance between beryllium and aluminium.
Answer:
Both Be2+ and Al3+ ions have high polarising power.

Question 23.
State any one reason for alkaline earth metals, in general, having a greater tendency to form complexes than alkali metals.
Answer:
Because of their small size and high charge, alkaline earth metals have a tendency to form complexes.

Question 24.
Amongst alkali metals why is lithium regarded as the most powerful reducing agent in aqueous solution?
Answer:
Lithium is the best reducing agent because it has the lowest reduction potential:
Li+ + e → Li(s) ERed = – 3.07V.

Question 25.
Name the metal amongst alkaline earth metals whose salt does not impart any colour to a non-luminous flame.
Answer:
Beryllium does not impart colour to a non-luminous flame.

Question 26.
What is the difference between baking soda and baking powder?
Answer:
Baking soda is sodium bicarbonate (NaHCO3) while baking powder is a mixture of sodium bicarbonate fNaHC03) and Potassium hydrogen tartrate.

Question 27.
Why does table salt get wet in the rainy season?
Answer:
Table salt contains impurities of CaCl2 and MgCl which being deliquescent compounds absorb moisture from the air during the rainy season.

Question 28.
Sodium readily forms Na+ ion, but never Na2+ ion. Explain.
Answer:
After the removal of 1 electron from Na, it has been left with a noble gas core [Ne] which is closer to the nucleus and requires more energy.

Question 29.
Which compound of sodium is used
(i) as a component of baking powder
Answer:
NaHCO3

(ii) for softening hard water.
Answer:
Na2CO3.

Question 30.
Anhydrous calcium sulphate cannot be used as Plaster of Paris. Give reason.
Answer:
Because it does not have the ability to set like plaster of Paris.

Question 31.
Which of the following halides is insoluble in water?
CaF2, CaCl2, CaBr2 and Cal2.
Answer:
CaF2.

Question 32.
Predict giving reason the outcome of the reaction.
Lil + KF → …………
Answer:
LiI + KF → LiF + KI
Larger cation stabilises larger anion.

Question 33.
Name three metal ions that play important role in performing several biological functions in the animal body.
Answer:
Na+, K+, Ca2+, Mg2+, etc.

Question 34.
Calcium metal is used to remove traces of air from vacuum tubes. Why?
Answer:
Calcium has a great affinity for oxygen and nitrogen.

Question 35.
Why is sodium kept in kerosene oil?
Answer:
To prevent its contact with oxygen and moist air, because sodium reacts with them.

Question 36.
What is brine?
Answer:
An aqueous solution of NaCl in water.

Question 37.
Why caesium can be used in photoelectric cells while lithium cannot be?
Answer:
Cs has the lowest & Li highest ionisation enthalpy. Hence Cs can lose electron very easily while lithium cannot.

Question 38.
In an aqueous solution, the Li+ ion has the lowest mobility. Why?
Answer:
Li+ ions are highly hydrated in an aqueous solution.

Question 39.
Lithium has the highest ionisation enthalpy in group-1, yet it is the strongest reducing agent. Why?
Answer:
This is because Li has the highest oxidation potential.
Li → Li+ + e
ox = + 3.07

Question 40.
Name one reagent or one operation to distinguish between
(i) BeSO4 and BaSO4
Answer:
BeSO4 is soluble in water while BaSO4 is not.

(ii) Be(OH)2 and Ba(OH)2
Answer:
Be(OH)2 dissolves in alkali, while Ba(OH)2 does not.

Question 41.
Which alkaline earth metal hydroxide is amphoteric?
Answer:
Be(OH)2.

Question 42.
Which alkali metal is radioactive?
Answer:
Francium (Fr).

Question 43.
Which alkaline earth metal is radioactive?
Answer:
Radium (Ra).

Question 44.
Name the alkali metal which shows a diagonal relationship with Mg.
Answer:
Lithium (Li).

Question 45.
Give the chemical formula of carnallite.
Answer:
KCl.MgCl2.6H2O.

Question 46.
Arrange CaSO4, SrSO4 & BaSO4 in order of decreasing solubility.
Answer:
The order of decreasing solubility of these sulphates is CaSO4, SrSO4 & BaSO4.

Question 47.
Why is K more reactive than Na?
Answer:
Since the valence electron of K is relatively at a greater distance than Na & it requires lesser energy to remove it.

Question 48.
Why does Beryllium show similarities with Al?
Answer:
Because of their similarity in charge/radius ratio (Be2+ = 0.064 & Al3+ = 0.660)

Question 49.
What is magnesia?
Answer:
Magnesium oxide (MgO).

Question 50.
How is Potassium extracted?
Answer:
By electrolysis of a fused solution of KOH.

The s-Block Elements Important Extra Questions Short Answer Type

Question 1.
Why the solubility of alkaline metal hydroxides increases down the group?
Answer:
If the anion and the cation are of comparable size, the cationic radius ‘vill influence the lattice energy. Since lattice energy decreases much more than the hydration energy with increasing ionic size, solubility will increases as we go down the group. This is the case of alkaline earth metal hydroxides.

Question 2.
Why the solubility of alkaline earth metal carbonates and sulphates decreases down the group?
Answer:
If the anion is large compared to the cation, the lattice; energy will remain almost constant within a particular group. Since the hydration energies decrease down the group, solubility will decrease as found for alkaline earth metal carbonates and sulphates.

Question 3.
Why cannot potassium carbonate be prepared by the SOLVAY process?
Answer:
Potassium carbonate cannot be prepared by the SOLVAY process because potassium bicarbonate (KHCO3) is highly soluble in water, unlike NaHCO3 which was separated as crystals. Due to its high solubility KHCO3 cannot be precipitated by the addition of ammonium bicarbonate to a saturated solution of KCl.

Question 4.
What are the main uses of calcium and magnesium?
Answer:
Main uses of calcium:

  1. Calcium is used in the extraction of metals from oxides which are difficult to reduce with carbon.
  2. Calcium, due to its affinity for O2 and N2 at elevated temperatures, has often been used to remove air from vacuum tubes.

Main uses of Magnesium:

  1. Magnesium forms alloys with Al, Zn, Mn and Sn. Mg-Al alloys being light in mass are used in aircraft construction.
  2. Magnesium (powder and ribbon) is used in flashbulbs, powders incendiary bombs and signals.
  3. A suspension of Mg(OH)2 in water is used as an antacid in medicine.
  4. Magnesium carbonate is an ingredient of toothpaste.

Question 5.
What is meant by the diagonal relationship in the periodic table? What is it due to?
Answer:
It has been observed that some elements of the second period show similarities with the elements of the third period situated diagonally to each other, though belonging to different groups. This is called a diagonal relationship.
The s-Block Elements Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 2
The cause of the diagonal relationship is due to the similarities in properties such as electronegativity, ionisation energy, size etc. between the diagonal elements. For example on moving from left to right across a period, the electronegativity increases, which on moving down a group, electronegativity decreases. Therefore on moving diagonally, two opposing tendencies almost cancel out and the electronegativity values remain almost the same as we move diagonally.

Question 6.
Why is the density of potassium less than that of sodium?
Answer:
Generally, in a group density increases with the atomic number, but potassium is an exception. It is due to the reason that the atomic volume of K is nearly twice Na, but its mass (39) is not exactly double of Na (23). Thus the density of potassium is less than that of sodium.

Question 7.
The hydroxides and carbonates of sodium and potassium are easily soluble in water while the corresponding salts of magnesium and calcium are sparingly soluble in water. Explain.
Answer:
Sodium and potassium ions (Na+ and K+) are larger than the corresponding Mg2+ and Ca2+ ions. Due to this lattice energy of Mg(OH)2, Ca(OH)2, MgCO3 and CaCO3. (Lattice energy is defined as the energy required to convert one mole of the ionic lattice into gaseous ions.

Thus lattices with smaller ions have higher lattice energies). The hydration energies of Mg2+ and Ca2+ are higher than Na+ and K+ because of their smaller sizes. But the difference in lattice energies is much more. Therefore, the hydroxides and carbonates of Mg2+ and Ca2+ are insoluble in water because of their higher lattice energies.

Question 8.
Why is it that the s-block elements never occur in free state/nature? What are their usual modes of occurrence and how are they generally prepared?
Answer:
The elements belonging to the s-block in the periodic table (i.e. alkali and alkaline earth metals) are highly reactive because of their low ionisation energy. They are highly electropositive forming positive ions. So they are never found in a free state.

They are widely distributed in nature in the combined state. They occur in the earth’s crust in the form of oxides, chlorides, silicates and carbonates.

Generally, a group I metals are prepared by the electrolysis of fused solution.
For example:

1. The s-Block Elements Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 3
At cathode: Na+ + e → Na
At anode: Cl → Cl + e
Cl + Cl → Cl2

2. KOH ⇌ K+ + OH
At cathode: K+ + e→ K
At anode: 4OH → 4OH + 4e
4OH → 2H2O + O2
or
4OH → 2H2O + O2 + 4e
These metals are highly reactive and therefore cannot be extracted by the usual methods, because they are strong reducing agents.

Question 9.
Explain what happens when
(i) Sodium hydrogen carbonate is heated.
Answer:
The s-Block Elements Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 4

(ii) Sodium with mercury reacts with water.
Answer:
2Na-Hg + 2H2O → 2NaOH + H2 ↑ + 2Hg

(iii) Fused sodium metal reacts with ammonia.
Answer:
The s-Block Elements Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 5

Question 10.
What is the effect of heat on the following compounds?
(a) Calcium carbonate
Answer:
The s-Block Elements Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 6

(b) Magnesium chloride hexahydrate
Answer:
The s-Block Elements Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 7

(c) Gypsum
Answer:
The s-Block Elements Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 8

(d) Magnesium sulphate heptahydrate.
Answer:
The s-Block Elements Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 9

Question 11.
Why is it that the s-block elements never occur in a free state? What are their usual modes of occurrence?
Answer:
The elements belonging to s-block in the periodic table. These metals (Alkali & alkaline earth metals) are highly reactive because of their low ionization energy. They are highly electropositive forming positive ions. So they are never found in a free state. They are widely distributed in nature in a combined state. They occur in the earth’s crust in the form of oxides, chlorides, silicates & carbonates.

Question 12.
Explain what happens when:
(a) Sodium hydrogen carbonate is heated.
Answer:
Sodium hydrogen carbonate on heating decomposes to sodium carbonate.
The s-Block Elements Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 10

(b) Sodium with Mercury reacts with water.
Answer:
When sodium with mercury reacts with water. It produces sodium hydroxide.
The s-Block Elements Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 11

Question 13.
What is the effect of heat on the following compounds:
(a) Calcium carbonate
Answer:
The s-Block Elements Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 12

(b) Magnesium chloride hexahydrate
Answer:
The s-Block Elements Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 13

(c) Gypsum
Answer:
The s-Block Elements Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 14

Question 14.
State as to why
(a) An aqueous solution of sodium carbonate gives an alkaline test.
Answer:
Sodium carbonate gets hydrolise by water to form an alkaline solution.
CO32- + H2O → HCO3 + OH
Due to this, it gives an alkaline test.

(b) Sodium is prepared by electrolytic method & not by chemical method.
Answer:
Sodium is a very strong reducing agent. Therefore, it cannot be isolated by a general reduction of its oxides or other compounds. The metal formed by electrolysis will immediately react with water forming hydroxides. So, sodium is prepared by the electrolytic method only.

(c) Lithium on being heated in the air mainly forms mono-oxide & not the peroxides.
Answer:
Lithium is the least reactive but the strongest reducing agent of all the alkali metals. It combines with air, it forms mono-oxide only because it does not react with excess air.
The s-Block Elements Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 15
Question 15.
Like Lithium in group-I, beryllium shows anomalous behaviour in group II. Write three such properties of beryllium which makes it anomalous in the group.
Answer:
1. Beryllium has an exceptionally small atomic size, due to high ionization energy & small atomic size it forms compounds that are largely covalent & its salts are hydrolysed easily.

2. Beryllium does not exhibit coordination N. more than four as in its valence shell (n = 2). There are only four orbitals. The remaining member of the group has co-ordination no. six by making use of group have co-ordination no. six by making use of some d-orbitals.

3. The oxides & hydroxides of beryllium quite unlike the other elements, in this group are amphoteric in nature.

Question 16.
Explain which one Na or K has a larger atomic radius?
Answer:
Potassium has a larger atomic size than sodium because, in K, the outermost electron is in the fourth energy state (4s1) while in Na, the outer-most electron is in the third energy state (3s1). That is r (K) > r (Na) since the fourth energy state (n = 4) in K is farther away from the nucleus than the third energy state (n = 3) in Na.

Question 17.
The alkali metals (group-1 elements) form only unipositive cations (M+) & not bivalent cations (M+2), Give reason.

Answer:
Alkali metals have an ns1 valence shell configuration. They can give up this electron to form univalent cations & attain stable electronic configuration like their nearest inner gas. Now the removal of an electron from the closed-shell configuration requires a very large amount of energy. Which is not available in chemical reactions. Therefore, the alkali metals form a univalent cation (M+) & No divalent cations (M2+) are formed.

Question 18.
Complete the following equations:
(a) Ca + H2O →?
Answer:
The s-Block Elements Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 16

(b) Ca(OH)2 + Cl2 →?
Answer:
2Ca(OH)2 + l → Ca(OCl)2 + CaCl2 + H2O

(c) BeO + NaOH →?
Answer:
BeO + 2NaOH → Na2BeO2 + H2O

Question 19.
How calcium carbonate can be changed into
(a) Calcium sulphate
(b) Calcium oxide?
Write a balanced chemical equation in each case.
Answer:
(a) When calcium carbonate is heated with dil. sulphuric acid, calcium sulphate is obtained.
CaCO3(s) + H2SO4(aq) → CaSO4(s) + CO2(g) + H2O(l)

(b) Calcium carbonate is heated at a high temperature between 1070 – 1270 K. It decomposes to give calcium oxide & carbon dioxide.
The s-Block Elements Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 17
Question 20.
Explain the following phenomenon by means of balanced equations:
(a) When exhaling is made through a tube passing into a solution of lime water, the solution becomes turbid.
Answer:
Ca(OH)2 (l) + CO2 (g) → CaCO3 (s) + H2O (l)

(b) The turbidity of solution in (a) eventually disappears when continued exhaling is made through it.
Answer:
CaCO3(s) + H2O(l) + CO2(g) → Ca(HCO3)2(aq)

(c) When the solution obtained in (B) is heated turbidity re-appears.
Answer:
Ca(HCO3)2(aq) → CaCO3(s) + H2O(l) + CO2(g)

Question 21.
Describe the reactivity of alkaline earth metals with water.
Answer:
The reactivity of alkaline earth metals with water increases with increasing atomic numbers.

  1. Beryllium does not react readily even with boiling water.
  2. Magnesium reacts very slowly with cold water. While it reacts with hot water at an appreciable rate & liberates hydrogen gas.
    The s-Block Elements Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 18
  3. Calcium, strontium & Barium react vigorously even with cold water & form hydroxides & liberate hydrogen gas
    M(s) + H2O(l) → M(OH)2 + H2(g)
    [M = Ca, Sr, Ba]

Question 22.
Compare the reactivity of alkali metals with water.
Answer:
All the alkali metals displace hydrogen from water i.e.
2M + 2H2O → 2MOH + H2

Lithium reacts slowly with water, sodium reacts violently & Cs reacts so vigorously that the reaction if not controlled can lead to an explosion.
2Li(s) + 2H2O(aq) → 2LiOH (aq) + H2(g) Slow
2Na(s) + 2H2O(aq) → 2NaOH (aq) + H2(g) Fast
2Cs(s) + 2H2O(aq) → 2CsOH (aq) + H2(g) Violent

Question 23.
Alkaline earth metals are harder than alkali metals. Give reason.
Answer:
Alkaline earth metals are harder than alkali metals because:

  1. The atomic radius of alkaline metals is small, atomic mass is high & density is larger than those of alkali metals. Alkaline earth metals have closed packed crystal structure.
  2. In alkaline earth metals, the metallic bonding in its crystal is very strong as compared to the crystal of an alkali metal. Therefore, the atoms in the crystal of alkaline earth metals are strongly bonded.

Question 24.
Differentiate amongst Quick lime, Lime water & Slaked lime.
Answer:
The s-Block Elements Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 19

Question 25.
The mobilities of alkali metal ions in aqueous solution follow the order
Li+ < Na+ < K+ < Rb+ < Cs+ Give reasons.
Answer:
Smaller ions are expected to have more mobility. But smaller ions such as Li+, Na+ due to their higher charge density tend to undergo hydration. Hydration increases the mass & effective size of the smaller ion & as a result, the mobility of ions show the trend given.

Question 26.
How is sodium peroxide manufactured? What happens when it reacts with chromium (III) hydroxide? Give it’s two uses.
Answer:
Sodium peroxide is manufactured by heating sodium metal on aluminium trays in the air (free-from CO2).
2Na + O2 (air) → Na2O2

Sodium Peroxide oxidises chromium (III) hydroxide to sodium chromate.
The s-Block Elements Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 20
Uses:

  • It is used as a bleaching agent because of its oxidising, power.
  • It is used in the manufacture of dyes & many other chemicals such as benzoyl peroxide, sodium perborate etc.

Question 27.
List three properties of Lithium in which it differs from the rest of the alkali metals.
Answer:
(a) Lithium is much harder, its melting & boiling points are higher than the other alkali metals.
(b) Lithium is the least reactive but the strongest reducing agent among all the alkali metals.
(c) LiCl is deliquescent & crystallise as a hydrate, LiCl.2H2O whereas other alkali metal chlorides do not form hydrates.

Question 28.
Why is LiF almost insoluble in water whereas LiCl is soluble not only in water but also in acetone?
Answer:
The low solubility of LiF is due to its high lattice enthalpy. LiCl has much higher solubility in water. This is due to the small size of Li+ ion & much higher hydration energy.

Question 29.
What happens when
(1) Calcium nitrate is heated,
Answer:
The s-Block Elements Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 21
(2) Chlorine reacts with slaked lime
Answer:
The s-Block Elements Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 22
(3) Quick lime is heated with silica.
Answer:
The s-Block Elements Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 23
Question 30.
Arrange the following in order of property mentioned:
(1) Mg(OH)2, Sr(OH)2, Ba(OH)2, Ca(OH)2
(Increasing ionic solubility in water)
Answer:
Mg(OH)2, Ca(OH)2, Sr(OH)2, Ba(OH)2

(2) BeO, MgO, BaO, CaO
(Increasing basic character)
Answer:
BeO, MgO, CaO, BaO

(3) BaCl2, MgCl2, BeCl,, CaCl2
(Increasing ionic character)
Answer:
BeCl2, MgCl2, CaCl2, BaCl2

The s-Block Elements Important Extra Questions Long Answer Type

Question 1.
What raw materials are used for making cement? Describe the manufacture of Portland cement. What is its approximate composition?
Answer:
Raw materials: The raw materials required for the manufacture of cement are limestone, stone and clay, limestone in calcium carbonate, CaCO3 and it provides calcium oxide, CaO. Clay- is a hydrated aluminium silicate, Al2O3 2Si02.2H20 and it provides alumina as well as silica. A small amount of gypsum, CaS04.2H20 is also required. It is added in calculated quantity in order to adjust the rate of setting of cement.

Manufacture: Cement is made by strongly heating a mixture of limestone and clay in a rotatory kiln. Limestone and clay are finely powdered and a little water is added to get a thick paste called slurry. The slurry is led into a rotatory kiln from the top through the hopper.

The hot gases produce a temperature of about 1770-1870 K in the kiln. At this high temperature, the limestone and clay present in the slurry combine to form cement in the form of small pieces called clinker. This clinker is mixed with 2 – 3 % by weight of gypsum (CaSO4 .2H2O) to regulate the setting time and is then ground to an exceedingly fine powder.
The s-Block Elements Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 24
Manufacture of cement
The s-Block Elements Class 11 Important Extra Questions Chemistry 25
When mixed with water the cement reacts to form a gelatinous mass which sets to a hard mass when three-dimensional cross-links are formed between
…………..Si — O — Si……… and …….. Si — O — Al…… chains.

Composition of cement:
CaO = 50 – 60%
SiO2 = 20 – 25%
Al2O3 = 5 – 10%
MgO = 2 – 3%
Fe2O3 = 1 – 2%
SO3= 1 – 2%

For a good quality cement, the ratio of silica (SiO2) and alumina (Al2O3) should be between 2.5 to 4.0. Similarly, the ratio of lime (CaO) to the total oxide mixtures consisting of SiO2, Al2O3 and Fe2O3 should be roughly 2: 1. If lime is in excess, the cement cracks during setting. On the other hand, if lime is less than required, the cement is weak in strength. Therefore, the proper composition of cement must be maintained to get cement of good quality.

Linear Programming Class 12 Notes Maths Chapter 12

By going through these CBSE Class 12 Maths Notes Chapter 12 Linear Programming, students can recall all the concepts quickly.

Linear Programming Notes Class 12 Maths Chapter 12

Linear Programming Problems: Problems that minimize or maximize a linear function Z subject to certain conditions, determined by a set of linear inequalities with non-negative variables, are known as Linear Programming Problems.

Objective Function: A linear function Z = ax + by, where a and b are constants, which has to be maximized or minimized according to a set of given conditions, is called a linear objective function.

Decision Variables: In the objective function Z = ax + by, the variables x, y are said to be decision variables.

Constraints: The restrictions in the form of inequalities on the variables of linear programming problems are called constraints. The conditions x > 0, y > 0 are known as non-negative restrictions.

Example: A dealer deals in only two items: wall hangings and artificial plants. He has ₹ 5,000 to invest in and a space to store at the most 80 pieces. A wall hanging costs him ₹300 and an artificial plant ₹150. He can sell a wall hanging at a profit of ₹50 and an artificial plant at a profit of ₹18. Assuming he can sell all the items that he buys, formulate a linear programming problem in order to maximize his profit.

Let x be the number of wall hanging and y be the number of artificial plants.
Profit on one wall-hanging = ₹50.
∴ Profit by selling x wall hangings = ₹50x
Profit on one artificial plant = ₹18

∴ Profit by selling y artificial plants = ₹18y
The total profit = 50x + 18y
∴ Z = 50x + 18y is the objective function.

A wall hanging costs = ₹300.
∴ Cost of x wall-hangings = ₹300x
The cost of one artificial plant = ₹150

∴ Cost of y artificial plants = ₹150y
The total investment = ₹(300x + 150y)

But the maximum investment = ₹15000
⇒ 300x + 150y ≤ 15000
or
2x + y ≤ 100.

Further, storage capacity to a maximum is 80 pieces.
⇒ x + y ≤ 80.

We know that x ≥ 0, y ≥ 0
Thus, the constraints are 2x + y ≤ 100, x + y ≤ 80,
x ≥ 0, y ≥ 0

R Programming MCQ questions are useful for the campus placement for all freshers including experience professionals and engineers.

Graphical Method of solving a linear programming Problem:
In the above example, the constraints are 2x + y ≤ 100, x + y ≤ 80, x ≥ 0, y ≥ 0.

Now, we draw the lines 2x + y = 100, x + y = 80, x = 0, y = 0 and we find the regions which represent these inequalities.
(i) Consider the inequality
2x + y ≤ 100 .
The line 2x + y = 100 passes through A(50, 0) and B(0,100).
Linear Programming Class 12 Notes Maths 1
Putting x = 0, y = 0 in 2x + y ≤ 100, we get 0 ≤ 100, which is true.

This shows origin lies in this region, i.e., the region 2x + y ≤ 100 lies on and below AB as shown in the figure.
1. Next inequality is x + y ≤ 80.
The line x + y = 80 passes through C(80,0) and D(0, 80).
Putting x = 0, y = 0 in x + y < 80, we get 0 ≤ 80, which is true.
⇒ Origin lies in this region, i.e., the region x + y ≤ 80 is on and below CD.
(iii) x > 0 is the region on and to the right of the y-axis.
(iv) y > 0 is the region on and above the x-axis.

→ Feasible Region: The common region determined by all the constraints including non-negative constraints x, y > 0 of linear programming problem is known as feasible region.
In the figure drawn, the shaded area OAPD is the feasible region, which is the common area of the regions drawn under the given constraints.

→ Feasible Solution: Points within and on the boundary of the feasible region represents feasible solutions of constraints.

In the above figure, every point of the shaded area (feasible region) is the feasible solution.
In the feasible region, there are infinitely many points (solutions) that satisfy the given conditions. But we would like to know the points, where Z is maximum or minimum.

→ Theorem 1: Let R be the feasible region for a linear programming problem and let Z = ax + by be the objective function. When Z has an optimum value (maximum or minimum), where variables x and y are subject to constraints described by linear inequalities, the optimal value must occur at a corner point (vertex) of the feasible region.

→ Theorem 2: Let R be the feasible region for a linear programming problem and let Z = ax + by be the objective function. If R is bounded, then the objective function Z has both maximum and minimum value on R and each of these occurs at a corner point (vertex) of R.

Solving the equation 2x + y = 100 and x + y = 80, we get the coordinates of the point P(20, 60). •
In the example given above,
The values of Z at corner points are
At D (0, 80), Z = 50x + 18y = 18 × 80 – 1440
At P(20, 60), Z = 50 × 20 + 18 × 60 = 1000 + 1080 = 2080
At A(50, 0), Z = 50 × 50 + 0 = 2500
At 0(0, 0), Z = O.
Thus, the maximum value of Z is ₹2080 at P(20, 60) and the minimum value of Z is ₹1440 at D(0, 80). In fact, the minimum value is ₹0 at O.

However, if the feasible region is unbounded, the optimal value obtained may not be maximum or minimum.

To determine the optimal point, we proceed as follows:

  1. Let M be the maximum value found as explained above, if the open half-plane determined by ax + by > M has no point in common with the feasible region, then M is the maximum value of Z. Otherwise Z has no maximum value.
  2. Similarly, if m is the minimum value of Z and if the open half-plane determined by ax + by < m, has no point in common with the feasible region, then m is the minimum value of Z, otherwise, Z has no minimum value.

Different Types of Linear Programming Problems:
A few important linear programming problems are as follows:
1. Manufacturing Problem: In such a problem, we determine

  1. a number of units of different products to be produced and sold.
  2. Manpower required, Machine hours needed, warehouse space available, etc. The objective function is to maximize profit.

2. Diet Problem: Here we determine the number of different types of constituents or nutrients which should be included in the diet. The objective function is to minimize the cost of production.

3. Transportation Problems: These problems deal with the costs of transportation which are to be minimized under given constraints.

1. LINEAR PROGRAMMING

Linear programming is a too! which is used in decision making in business for obtaining maximum and minimum values of quantities subject to certain constraints.

2. MATHEMATICAL FORMULATION

Let the linear function Z be defined by :
(i) Z = c1 x1 + c2x2 + … + cnxn, where c’s are constants.
Let aij. be (mn) constants and bj. be a set of m constants such that:
a11x1 + a12 x2 + … + a1n xn (≤ , = ,≥) b1
a21x1 + a22 x2 + … + a2n xn (≤ , = ,≥) b2
………………………………..
………………………………..
am1x1 + am2 x2 + … + amn xn (≤ , = ,≥) bm
and let (iii) x1 ≥ 0, x1 ≥ 0, …, x ≥ 0.

The problem of determining the values of x , x^, …, x which maximizes (or minimizes) Z and satisfying above (ii) is called General Linear Programming Problem (LPP).
Note : In (ii), there may be any sign <. =, or >.

3. SOME DEFINITIONS

A. (i) Objective Function. The linear function Z = ax + by, where a, b are constants, which is to be maximized or minimized is called a linear objective function of LPP.
The variables x and y are called decision variables.

(ii) Constraints. The linear inequalities or inequations or restrictions on the variables of a linear programming problem are called constraints of LPP.
The conditions ,r > 0, y > 0 are called non-negative restrictions of LPP.

(iii) Optimization Problem. A problem, in which it is required to maximize or minimize a linear function (say of two variables x and y) subject to certain constraints, determined by a set of linear inequalities, is called the optimizations problem.

(iv) Solution. The values of x, y which satisfy the constraints of LPP is called the solution of the LPP.

(v) Feasible Solution. Any solution of LPP, which satisfies the non-negative restrictions of
the problem, is called a feasible solution to LPP.

(vi) Optimum Solution. Any feasible solution, which optimizes (minimizes or maximizes) the objective function of LPP is called an optimum solution of the general LPP.

B. (i) Feasible Region. The common region, which is determined by all the constraints including non-negative constraints x, y > 0 of a LPP is called feasible region (or solution region.) The region, other than the feasible one, is called an infeasible region.

(ii) Feasible Solution. The points, which lie on the boundary and within the feasible region, represent the feasible solution of the constraints.
Any part outside the feasible solution is called infeasible solution.

(iii) Optimal (Feasible) Solution. Any point in the feasible region, which gives the optimal value (maximum or minimum) of the objective function, is called optimal solution. These points are infinitely many in number.

Theorem I. Let R be the feasible region (convex polygon) for LPP and Z = ax + by, the objective function.

When Z has an optimal value (max. or min.) where x, y are subject to constraints, this optimal value will occur at a comer point (vertex).

Theorem II. Let R be the feasible region for LPP and Z = ax + by, the objecti ve function. If R is bounded , then the objective function Z has both maximum and minimum values of R and each occurs at a corner point (vertex).

Key Point
When R is unbounded, max. (or min.) value of objective function may not exist. In case it exists, it occurs at a comer point of R.

4. CORNER POINT METHOD

In order to solve a Linear Programming Problem we use Corner Point Method which is as below

Step I. Obtain the feasible region of LPP and determine its comer points (vertices).
Step II. Evaluate the objective function Z = ax + by at each comer point (vertex).
Let M and m be the largest and smallest values at these points.
Step III. (a) When the feasible region is bounded,
then M and m are the maximum and minimum values of Z.

(b) When the feasible region is unbounded, then
(i) M is the maximum value of Z if the open half-plane determined by ax + by > M has no common point with the feasible region; otherwise Z has no maximum value
(ii) m is the minimum value of Z if the open half-plane determined by ax + by < m has no common point with the feasible region; otherwise Z has no minimum value.

Forming Questions Worksheet Exercises for Class 3 CBSE with Answers

Asking Questions Worksheet For Grade 3

This grammar section explains English Grammar in a clear and simple way. There are example sentences to show how the language is used. https://ncertmcq.com/forming-questions-exercises-for-class-3/

Forming Questions Worksheet Exercises for Class 3 CBSE with Answers PDF

  • Sometimes we form a question, by placing the verb at the beginning of the sentence. For example:-
    A. Foxes are clever animals.
    Are foxes clever animals?B. Saru is a member of the swimming club.
    Is Saru a member of the swimming club?

Forming Questions
Presentation

Read the picture story.
Framing Questions For Class 3

Worksheet On Asking Questions For Class 3
A. Answer the following questions.

1. What did Arun ask his mother? _____________________
2. What did mother reply? _____________________
3. Give another word for ‘yummy’. _____________________

Answer The Following Questions Class 3
B. Write a question for each answer below. Remember to put (?) at the end of the sentence.

1. ______________________
Sarah is a good girl.

2. ______________________
I am a working lady.

3. ______________________
We are coming today.

4. ______________________
It was a great sight.

5. ______________________
Kitty is a greedy cat.

Kbps Full Form: Kilobits per second … Post navigation.

Forming Questions Worksheet Exercises for Class 3 with Answers CBSE PDF

Class 3 Grammar Question
A. Fill in the correct form (Is/Are/Was/ Were) of the verb.

1. ___________ you ___________ at a hotel in London last month? (to stay)
2. ___________ he ___________ to the CD? (to listen)
3. ___________ you ___________ shoes yesterday? (to wear)
4. ___________ Ben ___________ in the race? (to run)
5. ___________ your brother ___________ in the tent last night? (to sleep)
6. ___________ the students ___________ English? (to learn)
7. ___________ the children ___________ in the garden yesterday? (to play)
8. ___________ Jake ___________ a pizza? (to eat)
9. ___________ You ___________ to Mona? (to talk)
10. ___________ we ___________ a cake? (to bake)

Forming Questions Exercises
B. Rearrange each group of words below to form a question.

1. today/is/dad/ill/? _________________
2. Tom/is /older/you/than/? _________________
3. Monu/was/bike/riding/a/? _________________
4. Am/I /fast/driving/? _________________
5. the/exam/going/I/am/to/pass? _________________

CBSE Sample Papers for Class 12 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions

Students can access the CBSE Sample Papers for Class 12 Accountancy with Solutions and marking scheme Term 2 Set 2 will help students in understanding the difficulty level of the exam.

CBSE Sample Papers for Class 12 Accountancy Standard Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions

Time Allowed: 2 Hours
Maximum Marks: 40

General Instructions:

  • This question paper comprises two Parts – A and B. There are 12 questions in the question paper. Alt1 questions are compulsory.
  • Part-A is compulsory for all candidates.
  • Part-B has two options i.e., (i) Analysis of Financial Statements and (ii) Computerized Accounting. Students must attempt only one. of the given options.
  • There is no overall choice. However, an internal choice has been provided in 3 questions of three marks and 1 question of five marks.

PART-A
(Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisations, Partnership Firms, and Companies)

Fibonacci calculator is a simple and useful tool that can help you to calculate Fibonacci extension.

Question 1.
Following information has been provided by Fitbit Sports Academy. You are required to calculate the sports materials consumed during the year 2020-21:
Receipts and Payments Account (An Extract)
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 12 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 1
Additional Information:
Sports Materials in Hand on 31st March 2020 – ₹ 11,000. (2)
Answer:
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 12 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 2
Alternatively, Sports Material consumed can also be calculated as
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 12 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 3
Sports Materials Consumed = Opening Stock + Purchases — Closing Stock
= ₹ 4,000 + ₹ 67,000 – ₹ 11,000
= ₹ 60,000.

CBSE Sample Papers for Class 12 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions

The Recursive Sequences Formula Calculator finds the equation of the sequence and also allows you to view the next terms in the sequence.

Question 2.
Differentiate between Revaluation Account and Realisation Account based on:
(A) Time of preparation
(B) Effect on accounts (2)
Answer:
Difference between Revaluation Account and Realisation Account

Basis of Difference Revaluation Account Realization Account
(A) Time of preparation A revaluation Account is prepared when there is any change in the partnership deed like admission of a partner, retirement of a partner, or death of a partner. The realization Account is prepared at the time of dissolution of a partnership firm.
(B) Effect on accounts In Revaluation Account, the assets and Liabilities accounts are revaluated not closed. In Realisation, accounts
are the assets and closed.

Question 3.
In a partnership firm, Juhi, Sakhi, Kiara, and Tiska were partners sharing profits and losses is the ratio of 3:2: 2:1. On February 1, 2021, Tiska retired from the firm and the new profit sharing ratio decided between Juhi, Sakhi and Kiara was 3/5, 1/5, and 1/5 respectively.

At the time of Tiska’s retirement, the goodwill of the firm was valued at ₹ 10,80,000. Paas the necessary journal entry in the books of the firm for the treatment of goodwill on Tiska’s retirement. Also, show working notes clearly. (2)
Answer:
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 12 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 4
Working Notes:
(1) Calculation of Gaining Rutio:
Old Profit sharing ratio of Juhi, Sakshi, Kiara and Tiska = 3: 2 : 2: 1
New profit sharing ratio of Juhi, Sokshi and Kiara = 3: 1: 1
Gaining Ratio = New Profit Shoring Ratio — Old Profit Shoring Ratio
Juhi Gain/Sacnfice = \(\frac{3}{5}-\frac{3}{8}=\frac{24-15}{40}=\frac{9}{40}\) (Gain)
Sakshi’s Gain/Sacrifice = \(\frac{1}{5}-\frac{2}{8}=\frac{8-10}{40}=\left(\frac{2}{40}\right)\) (Sacrifice)
Kiara s Gain/Sacrifice = \(\frac{1}{5}-\frac{2}{8}=\frac{8-10}{40}=\left(\frac{2}{40}\right)\) (Sacrifice)

(ii) CalcuLation of Share of Goodwill
Tiska’s Share of Goodwill = ₹ 10,80.000 x \(\frac{1}{8}\) = ₹ 1.35,000
As Sakshi and Kiara are also sacrificing partners, both of them wilt be compensated along with Tiska by Juhi in their sacrificing ratio.
Juhi’ Gain = ₹ 10,80.000 x \(\frac{9}{40}\) = ₹ 2,43,000
Sakshi’s Sacrifice = ₹ 10,80.000 x \(\frac{2}{40}\) = ₹ 54,000
Kiara’s Sacrifice = ₹ 10,80,000 x \(\frac{2}{40}\) = ₹ 54,000

RSD Calculator is free online tool.

Question 4.
How are the following items of subscriptions shown in the Income and Expenditure Account of Picasa Club for the year ended 31st March 2020 and Balance Sheet as at 31st March 2020?

Particulars Amount (₹)
Subscriptions received during the year ended 31 March 2020 3,58,500
Subscriptions outstanding on 31 March 2019 30,000
Subscriptions received in advance on 31 March 2019 22,500
Subscriptions received in advance on 31 March 2020 13,500
Subscriptions outstanding on 3l March 2020 37,500

OR
In the foLLowing Income and Expenditure Account for the year ended 31 March 2021, determine
the missing information:
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 12 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 5 (3)
Answer:
In the Books of Picasa Limited Income and Expenditure Account (An Extract)
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 12 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 6
Balance Sheet (An Extract)
as at 31St March 2020

Liabilities Amount (₹) Assets Amount (₹)
Subscriptions Received in Advance 13,500 Subscriptions Outstanding 37,500

OR
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 12 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 7

CBSE Sample Papers for Class 12 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions

Question 5.
In a partnership firm ‘Sarega Limited’, Samar, Reeta, and Gagan are partners sharing profits and losses in the ratio 4:3:1. As per the terms of the Partnership Deed of the firm, on the death of any partner, goodwill was to be valued at 50% of the net profits credited to that Partner’s Capital Account during the last three completed years before his/her death.
The profits and losses for the last five years were:
2016-17 ₹ 1,20,000
2017-18 ₹ 1,94,00
2018-19 ₹ 2,10,000
2019-20 ₹ 60,000
2020-2 1 ₹ 1,68O00
On 1st April, 2021, Samar dies. On that date, land and building was found undervalued by ₹ 1,60,000, which was to be considered.
Calculate the amount of Samar’s share of goodwill in the firm and pass the necessary adjusting journal entries of goodwill and revaluation of assets. (3)
Answer:
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 12 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 8
Working Notes:
Total Profit of last three year’s = ₹ 2,10,000 + ₹ 60,000 +₹ 1,68,000 = ₹ 4,38,000
Sama’s share in prcMt already credited ta his account = ₹ 4, 38, 000 x \(\frac{4}{8}\) = ₹2,19,000
∴ Sarnar’s share of goodwill = Rs. 2.19.000 x \(\frac{50}{100}\) = ₹ 1,09,500.

Question 6.
On 1st Nov. 2020, Tata Ltd. issued 20,000, 10% debenture of ₹ 100 each at a discount of 5%, redeemable at par after four years. The debentures were fully subscribed. It has a balance of ₹ 40,000 in capital reserve and ₹ 75,000 in Securities Premium Reserve which the company decided to use for writing off the discount on issue of debentures. Pass the journal entries for issue of debentures and writing off the discount. Also, prepare discount on issue of Debentures Account.
OR
Wisdom Fireworks Limited issued 10,000, 12% debentures of ₹ 100 each at par for cash. It also raised a loan of ₹ 1,60,000 from Punjab National Bank, for which the company placed with the bark ₹ 2,00,000,12% debentures as collateral security.

As per the terms, Punjab National Bank is obliged and bound to immediately release the debentures as soon as the loan is repaid. How will you show the debentures in the Balance Sheet of Wisdom Fireworks Limited assuming that the company has recorded the issue of debentures as collateral in the book. (3)
Answer:
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 12 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 9
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 12 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 10
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 12 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 11

Question 7.
The Balance Sheet of X, Y, and Z who were sharing profits and losses in ratio of their capitals stood as follows:
Balance Sheet
as on 31st March 2020
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 12 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 12
Y retired on 1st April, 2020 and the following adjustments were agreed upon:
(i) Out of the insurance premium debited to Profit and Loss Account, ₹ 1,500 to be carried forward as Prepaid Insurance.
(ii) Provision for Doubtful Debts to be brought up to 5% of Sundry Debtors.
(iii) Land and Building to be appreciated by 20%.
(iv) A provision of ₹ 4,000 be made in respect of outstanding bills for repairs.
(v) Goodwill of the firm was determined at ₹ 21,600.
(vi) Y’s share of goodwill be adjusted to that of X and Z who will share profits in future in the ratio of 3 :1.
Pass necessary Journal entries and prepare the Balance Sheet after Y’s retirement.
OR
Rohit and Virat are equal partners of a partnership firm ‘RV Limited’. They decided to dissolve their partnership firm on 31st March 2020, at which date the Balance Sheet of the firm stood as:
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 12 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 13
Additional Information:
(i) The assets realized were:
Stock ₹ 22,000; Debtors ₹ 7,500; Machinery ₹ 16,000; Land & Building ₹ 35,000.
(ii) Virat took over the Furniture & Fittings at ₹ 9,000.
(iii) Rohit agreed to accept ₹ 2,500 in full settlement of his Loan Account.
(iv) Dissolution Expenses amounted to ₹ 2,500.
You are required to prepare:
(A) Realisation Account
(B) Capital Account of Partners
(C) Bank Account. (5)
Answer:
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 12 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 14
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 12 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 16
Working notes:
(1)
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 12 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 17
(2)
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 12 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 18

(3) Calculation of Old Ratio:
Capitol Ratio = CBSE Sample Papers for Class 12 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 19
∴ Old Ratio of X, Y and Z= 3:2: 1

(4) CalcuLation of Gaining Ratio:
Old Ratio of X,Y and Z = 3:2:1
New Ratio of X and Z =3:1
Gaining Ratio = New Ratio – Old Ratio
X’s Gain = \(\frac{3}{4}-\frac{3}{6}=\frac{9-6}{12}=\frac{3}{12}\)
Z’ s Gain = \(\frac{1}{4}-\frac{1}{6}=\frac{3-2}{12}=\frac{1}{12}\)
Gaining Ratio of X and Z = 3: 1

(5) Adjustment of Good will:
Goodwiti of the Firm = ₹ 21,600
Y’s Share of GoodwilL = ₹ 21,600 x \(\frac{2}{6}\) = ₹ 7,200
Y’s share of goodwill will be compensated b X and Z in their Gaining Ratio i.e., 3: 1
X will compensate = 7.200 x \(\frac{3}{4}\) = ₹ 5,400
Y will compensate = 7,200 x \(\frac{1}{4}\) = ₹ 1,800
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 12 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 20
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 12 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 21
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 12 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 22

CBSE Sample Papers for Class 12 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions

Question 8.
Himadri Construction Limited engaged in the business of construction with a registered office in Bangalore, Karnataka was incorporated on 1st April 2016. The company is doing well and wants to penetrate their roots in other cities. With such objective Himadri Construction Limited purchased the running business of Godavari Construction Limited having business in Coimbatore, Mysore and Salem for a sum of ₹ 90,00,000. The assets and liabilities of Godavari Construction Limited consisted of the following:
Land ₹ 42,00,000
BuiLdings ₹ 36,00,000
Inventories ₹ 12,00,000
Sundry Debtors ₹ 18,00,000
Sundry Creditors ₹ 12,00,000
Himadri Construction Limited paid ₹ 18,00,000 in cash and for the balance amount issued 10% Debentures of? 100 each at par, redeemable after 6 years at par for the sum due to Godavari Construction Limited.

You are required to answer the following questions:
(A) Calculate the amount to be transferred to Capital Reserve Account.
(B) Pass journal entry to be passed at the time of purchase of business of Godavari Construction Limited.
(C) Pass journal entry for payment made in cash to Godavari Construction Limited.
(D) Calculate the number of debentures issued to Godavari Construction Limited.
(E) Pass journal entry for the allotment of debentures to Godavari Construction Limited. (5)
Answer:
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 12 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 23
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 12 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 24
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 12 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 25
(D) Amount paid in Cash = ₹ 18,00,000
Amount paid through Debentures = ₹ 90,00,000 – ₹ 18,00.000 = ₹ 72,00,000
Number of Debentures Issued to Godavari Construction Limited
= \(\)\frac{\text { Amount Due }}{\text { Issue Price }}=\frac{₹ 72,00,000}{₹ 100}[/lattex] = 72,000

(E) In the Books of Himadri Construction Limited
Journal
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 12 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 26

Question 9.
Following is the Receipts and Payments Account of Society Welfare Club for the year ended 31st March, 2020:
Receipts and Payments Account
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 12 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 27
Additional Information:

Particulars 31st March 2019 (₹ ) 31st March 2020 (₹ )
Outstanding Salary to Staff 2,400 3,600
Prepaid Insurance 1,400 600
Outstanding Subscriptions 7,500 5,000
Subscriptions Received in Advance 3,500 2,000
Outstanding Electricity Charges 2,500
Stock of Stationery 4,500 1,400
Equipments 51,200 1,00,400
Building 4,80,000 2,28,000
Investments 2,80,000 1,40,000

From the information provided, you are required to prepare Income and Expenditure Account of Society Welfare Club for the year ended 31st March 2020. (5)
Answer:
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 12 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 28
Working Note:
(1) CalcuLation of Depreciation on Equipments:
Amount of Depreciation on Equipments = Opening Balance + Purchase during the year – Sale during the year- Closing Balance
= ₹ 51,200 + ₹ 60,000 – 0 – ₹ 1,00,400
= ₹ 10,800

(2) CaLculation of Depreciation on Building:
Amount of Depreciation on Building = Opening Balance + Purchase during the year – Sale during the year – Closing Balance
= ₹ 2,40,000 + 0- 0 – ₹ 2,28,000
= ₹ 12,000

PART-B
Option-1
(Analysis of Financial Statements)

Question 10.
State which of the following transactions will result in inflow, outflow, or no flow of Cash and Cash Equivalents:
(A) Cash is withdrawn from Bank.
(B) Declaration of Interim Dividend. (2)
Answer:
(A) Cash withdrawn from Bank will, resuLt into no flow of Cash and Cash Equivalents.
(B) Declaration of Interim Dividend will resuLt into the outflow of Cash and Cash Equivalents.

CBSE Sample Papers for Class 12 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions

Question 11.
From the following Statement of Profit and Loss, prepare Comparative Statement of Profit and Loss:
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 12 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 29
Notes to Accounts:
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 12 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 30
OR
The Balance Sheets of Sohan Limited and Mohan Limited as at 31st March 2021 was as follows:
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 12 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 31
You are required to prepare Common Size Balance Sheet as at 31st March 2021. (3)
Answer:
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 12 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 32
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 12 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 33

Question 12.
From the following Statement of Profit and Loss for the year ended 31st March 2019, Balance Sheet as at 31st March 2019 and Notes to Accounts of Rathi Limited, prepare its Cash Flow Statement:
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 12 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 34
Balance Sheet as at 31st March, 2019
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 12 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 35
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 12 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 36 (5)

Answer:
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 12 Accountancy Term 2 Set 2 with Solutions 37